Culture Jam

"The second American Revolution is under way and Kalte Lasn is one ol its Tom Paines."
— Ujgki Robin, coauthor at Your Money or Your Life

F o u n

p

A S N

Magazine

CULTURE JAM

HOW TO REVERSE AMERICA'S SUICIDAL
CONSOMEfrRINGE — AND WHY WE MOST

Culture Jam

Culture Jam

HOW TO REVERSE
AMERICA'S SUICIDAL CONSUMER
BINGE — AND WHY WE MUST

Kalle Lasn

An Imprint of HarpcrCollinsiWu/ben

A hardcover edition of this book was published in 1999 by Eagle Brook, an imprint of
William Morrow and Company, Inc.

culture jam. Copyright © 1999 by Kalle Lasn. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States
of America. No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any manner whatsoever
without written permission except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical arti-
cles and reviews. For information address HarperCollins Publishers Inc., 10 East 53rd Street,
New York, NY 10022.

HarperCollins books may be purchased for educational, business, or sales promotional use.
For information please write: Special Markets Department, HarperCollins Publishers Inc.,
10 East 53rd Street, New York, NY 10022.

First Quill edition published 2000.

Designed by Chris Dixon at Adbusters Media Foundation and Michael Mendelsohn at MM
Design 2000, Inc.

The Library of Congress has catalogued the hardcover edition as follows:

Culture jam : the uncooling of America / Kalle Lasn. — 1st ed.

p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references.
ISBN 0-688-15656-8

1. Mass media and culture. 2. Mass media — Influence. 3. Mass media and the
environment. 4. Mass media criticism. 5. Popular culture. 6. Social movements.

Lasn, Kalle.

7. Intercultural communication.
I. Title.

P94.6.L37 1999
302.23— dc21

99-18409
CIP

ISBN 0-688-17805-7 (pbk.)

01 02 03 04 ❖ / RRD 10 9 8 7 6

For my beloved mother. Leida Lasn.
and for Masako Lasn. my partner in life

my teachers Kristjan Lasn.

Fritz Schumacher. Marshall McLuhan.

Guy Debord

my friends Ron Coxhead, Bill Schmalz.
Geoff Rogers. Hideo Iso. Doug Tompkins.
Tadao and Hanae Tominaga

and for my mortal enemy. Philip Morris Inc..
which I vow to take down

This book was written in a close, intense,
two-year collaboration with my friend
Bruce Grierson. Without his perseverance
and magic way with words, it would never
have seen the light of day.

James MacKinnon weighed in near the
end with a flurry of brilliant ideas.

Ingrid Richardson and Katherine Dodds
were my philosophical gurus. Ryan Bigge
and Paul Shoebridge kept it on the tracks.

Allan Casey. Cat Simril, Charles Dobson,
Sid Tafler. Jurgen Hesse. Jonathon Priddle.
John Mraz. Kyle Frederiksen. Hilary Keever and
Jordan Reeves critiqued the various drafts.

Joann Davis took out all the swear words.

Contents

Introduction: Culture Jamming xi

Autumn

Mood Disorders 3

The Ecology of Mind 9

Media Virus 29

The Manchurian Consumer 37

Posthuman 43

Winter

The Cult You're In 51

The End of the American Dream 59

The Unofficial History of America™ 65

Your Corporate Connection 73

The Global Economic Pyramid Scheme 85

Spring

The Revolutionary Impulse 99

The New Activism (Fire in the Belly) 1 1 1

The Meme Wars 1 23

The Meme Warrior 129

Summer

Rage 139
The Second American Revolution

(An Assertiveness Training Workshop for Culture Jammers) 145

Grounding the Corporation 157

Demarketing Loops 165

Media Carta 185

Redefining Progress 201

Epilogue: The Millennial Moment of Truth 2 1 1

Notes 217

Index 237

INTRODUCTION: CULTURE JAMMING

The book you're holding carries a message that your first instinct will be
to distrust. That message is, We can change the world. It's risky these days
to make such a promise because it sounds like one of those meaningless
"awaken the inner giant"-type bromides: "If you can dream it, you can do
it," "The journey of a thousand miles begins with a single step," and so on.

But it's true. We're serious. We call ourselves culture jammers.
We're a loose global network of media activists who see ourselves as the
advance shock troops of the most significant social movement of the
next twenty years. Our aim is to topple existing power structures and
forge major adjustments to the way we will live in the twenty-first cen-
tury. We believe culture jamming will become to our era what civil
rights was to the '60s, what feminism was to the '70s, what environmen-
tal activism was to the '80s. It will alter the way we live and think. It will
change the way information flows, the way institutions wield power, the
way TV stations are run, the way the food, fashion, automobile, sports,
music and culture industries set their agendas. Above all, it will change
the way we interact with the mass media and the way in which meaning
is produced in our society.

xii Introduction

We are a very diverse tribe. Our people range from born-again
Lefties to Green entrepreneurs to fundamentalist Christians who
don't like what television is doing to their kids; from punk anarchists
to communications professors to advertising executives searching for
a new role in life. Many of us are longtime activists who in the midst
of our best efforts suddenly felt spiritually winded. For us feminism
had run out of steam, the environmental movement no longer excited,
the fire no longer burned in the belly of the Left, and youth rebellion
was looking more and more like an empty gesture inspired by Nike.
We were losing.

Then we had an idea. Maybe if we banged together the heads of
all these activists and reconfigured the fragmented forces of identity
politics into a new, empowered movement, we could start winning
again.

We weren't looking for it necessarily, but each one of us in our
own way has had a political awakening; a series of very personal
"moments of truth" about ourselves and how the world works. For
some, these insights have come on like powerful, secular epiphanies.
Sometimes they have been triggered by things we overheard or read or
stumbled upon. Sometimes they have involved things we thought we
knew but now, suddenly, felt. These truths have left us shaken; it's no
exaggeration to say they have changed our lives. I'd like to share with
you some of the insights that have occurred to me over the last decade
or so.

America is no longer a country. It's a multitrillion-dollar brand. Amer-
ica™ is essentially no different from McDonald's, Marlboro or General
Motors. It's an image "sold" not only to the citizens of the U.S.A., but to
consumers worldwide. The American brand is associated with catch-
words such as "democracy," "opportunity" and "freedom." But like ciga-
rettes that are sold as symbols of vitality and youthful rebellion, the
American reality is very different from its brand image. America™ has
been subverted by corporate agendas. Its elected officials bow before
corporate power as a condition of their survival in office. A collective

Introduction xiii
sense of powerlessness and disillusionment has set in. A deeply felt
sense of betrayal is brewing.

American culture is no longer created by the people. Our stories, once
passed from one generation to the next by parents, neighbors and
teachers, are now told by distant corporations with "something to sell as
well as to tell." Brands, products, fashions, celebrities, entertainments —
the spectacles that surround the production of culture — are our culture
now. Our role is mostly to listen and watch — and then, based on what
we have heard and seen, to buy.

A free, authentic life is no longer possible in America™ today. We are
being manipulated in the most insidious way. Our emotions, personali-
ties and core values are under siege from media and cultural forces too
complex to decode. A continuous product message has woven itself into
the very fabric of our existence. Most North Americans now live
designer lives — sleep, eat, sit in car, work, shop, watch TV, sleep again. I
doubt there's more than a handful of free, spontaneous minutes any-
where in that cycle. We ourselves have been branded. The human spirit of
prideful contrariness and fierce independence has been oddly tamed.
We have evolved into a smile-button culture. We wear the trendiest
fashions, drive the best cars industry can produce and project an image
of incredible affluence — cool people living life to the hilt. But behind
that happy mask is a face so ugly it invariably shocks the hell out of my
friends from developing countries who come to visit, expecting the
giddy Americana depicted on TV and finding instead a horror show of
disconnection and anomie.

Our mass media dispense a kind of Huxleyan "soma." The most
powerful narcotic in the world is the promise of belonging. And belong-
ing is best achieved by conforming to the prescriptions of America™. In
this way a perverted sense of cool takes hold of the imaginations of our
children. And thus a heavily manipulative corporate ethos drives our
culture. Cool is indispensable — and readily, endlessly dispensed. You
can get it on every corner (for the right price), though it's highly addic-
tive and its effects are short-lived. If you're here for cool today, you'll
almost certainly be back for more tomorrow.

xiv Introduction

American cool is a global pandemic. Communities, traditions, cul-
tural heritages, sovereignties, whole histories are being replaced by a
barren American monoculture.

Living in Japan during its period of sharpest transition to a western
way of life, I was astonished by the speed and force with which the
American brand took hold. I saw a culture with thousands of years of
tradition behind it vanquished in two generations. Suddenly, high
school girls were selling themselves after class for $150 a trick so they'd
have cash to buy American jeans and handbags.

The Earth can no longer support the lifestyle of the coolhunting
American-style consumer. We have sought, bought, spewed and
devoured too much, too fast, too brazenly, and now we're about to pay.
Economic "progress" is killing the planet.

This did not fully hit home for me until 1989, when a spate of
nightmarish environmental stories suddenly appeared on the news:
acid rain, dying seals in the North Sea, medical waste washing up on
New York beaches, garbage barges turned away from port after port, a
growing hole in the ozone layer, and the discovery that the milk in
American mothers' breasts had four times the amount of DDT permit-
ted in cow's milk. In that year a critical mass of people saw the light and
became "environmentalists." We were witnessing the specter of a whole
planet heading for ruin. To people like me for whom time had always
seemed like a constant, eternally moving train which people got on and,
seventy years later, got off, it was the end of innocence. The premoni-
tion of ecocide — planetary death — became real for the first time, and it
terrified me. It still does.

Once you experience even a few of these "moments of truth," things can
never be the same again. Your life veers off in strange new directions. It's
very exciting and a little scary. Ideas blossom into obsessions. The
imperative to live life differently keeps building until the day it breaks
through the surface.

When it happened to me I was in my neighborhood supermarket
parking lot. I was plugging a coin into a shopping cart when it suddenly

Introduction xv

occurred to me just what a dope I was. Here I was putting in my quarter
for the privilege of spending money in a store I come to every week but
hate, a sterile chain store that rarely carries any locally grown produce
and always makes me stand in line to pay. And when I was finished
shopping I'd have to take this cart back to the exact place their efficiency
experts have decreed, and slide it back in with all the other carts,
rehook it and push the red button to get my damn quarter back.

A little internal fuse blew. I stopped moving. I glanced around to
make sure no one was watching. Then I reached for that big bent coin
I'd been carrying in my pocket and I rammed it as hard as I could
into the coin slot. And then with the lucky Buddha charm on my
keyring I banged that coin in tight until it jammed. I didn't stop to
analyze whether this was ethical or not — I just let my anger flow. And
then I walked away from that supermarket and headed for the little
fruit and vegetable store down the road. I felt more alive than I had in
months.

Much later I realized I had stumbled on one of the great secrets of
modern urban existence: Honor your instincts. Let your anger out.
When it wells up suddenly from deep in your gut, don't suppress it- —
channel it, trust it, use it. Don't be so unthinkingly civil all the time.
When the system is grinding you down, unplug the grinding wheel.

Once you start thinking and acting this way, once you realize that
consumer capitalism is by its very nature unethical, and therefore it's
not unethical to jam it; once you understand that civil disobedience has
a long and honorable history that goes back to Gandhi, Martin Luther
King, Jr., and Henry David Thoreau; once you start trusting yourself
and relating to the world as an empowered human being instead of a
hapless consumer drone, something remarkable happens. Your cyni-
cism dissolves.

If cool is the Huxleyan "soma" of our time, then cynicism is its poi-
sonous, paralytic side effect. It is the dark side of cool. It's part of the
reason we watch too much TV and don't bother to vote. It's why we get
stuck year after year in tedious, meaningless jobs. It's why we're bored so
much of the time and become compulsive shoppers.

xvi Introduction

To find a way out of cynicism is to find a way out of the postmod-
ern malaise. On the far side of cynicism lies freedom. And the pursuit of
freedom is what revolutions — and this book — are all about.

The Situationists saw this revolution coming long ago. The French
philosophical movement that inspired the 1968 Paris riots predicted
what might happen to a society driven by consumer capitalism. The Sit-
uationists intuited how hard it would be to hang on to one's core self in
a "society of spectacle," a world of manufactured desires and manipu-
lated emotions. Guy Debord, the leader of the Situationist movement,
said: "Revolution is not showing life to people, but making them live." This
instinct to be free and unfettered is hard-wired into each one of us. It's
a drive as strong as sex or hunger, an irresistible force that, once har-
nessed, is almost impossible to stop.

With that irresistible force on our side, we will strike.

We will strike by smashing the postmodern hall of mirrors and
redefining what it means to be alive. We will reframe the battle in the
grandest terms. The old political battles that have consumed
humankind during most of the twentieth century — black versus white,
Left versus Right, male versus female — will fade into the background.
The only battle still worth fighting and winning, the only one that can
set us free, is The People versus The Corporate Cool Machine.

We will strike by unswooshing America™, by organizing resistance
against the power trust that owns and manages that brand. Like Marl-
boro and Nike, America™ has splashed its logo everywhere. And now
resistance to that brand is about to begin on an unprecedented scale. We
will uncool its fashions and celebrities, its icons, signs and spectacles.
We will jam its image factory until the day it comes to a sudden, shud-
dering halt. And then on the ruins of the old consumer culture, we will
build a new one with a noncommercial heart and soul.

It will be an enormous culture jam, a protracted war of ideas, ide-
ologies and visions of the future. It may take a generation or even more.
But it will be done. This book is dedicated to explaining how.

Think of Culture Jam: The Uncooling of America™ as a rebranding
strategy — a social demarketing campaign unfolding over four seasons.

Introduction xvii

In Part One, Autumn, we assess the current damages. We begin
with a journey through the mental environment, which is sending out
the same kind of early warning signals that the physical environment
did thirty-five years ago. What does it mean when our lives and culture
are no longer shaped by nature, but by an electronic mass media envi-
ronment of our own creation?

In Part Two, Winter, we rough out the problem. America, and
much of the rest of the world now, is caught in a media-consumer
trance. A numbing sense of commercial artificiality pervades our post-
modern era. Can spontaneity and authenticity be restored?

In Part Three, Spring, we explore possibilities for renewal. Has the
wild American spirit been tamed? Is an oppositional culture still possi-
ble? Can we launch another revolution?

In Part Four, Summer, we catch a glimpse of what could happen if
the American revolutionary impulse reignites.

If it does nothing else, I hope this book gives you pause. Wherever
you are, whatever you're doing, I hope it serves as what the Situationists
called a detournement — a perspective-jarring turnabout in your every-
day life.

World War III will be a guerrilla
information war. with no division between
military and civilian participation.

— Marshall McLuhan

autumn

MOOD DISORDERS

Imagine that you are a member of a typical postmodern family, living in
a typical house, in a typical neighborhood, in a typical North American
city. You're overleveraged and overworked. You eat a lot of takeout, your
kids holler for Nikes and the TV is on five hours a day. One day it dawns
on you that, as a family, you're failing. You aren't so much a family as
five strangers sharing power and water.

You decide, as a tonic, to go on a camping trip — a pit-latrine-and-
flame-cooked-wieners experience uncorrupted by phones, faxes or Bay-
watch. In the absence of electronic distractions, you will get to know
each other again.

After only a few hours in the wilderness, though, it becomes clear
that you don't know how to do this. You might as well have been shot
into deep space, so psychologically ill-equipped are you for the enforced
camaraderie of the outside world.

Your kids experience actual physical withdrawal from television.
Your seven-year-old can't finish a whole sentence or stay focused on
more than three bites of her Van Camp's beans. She wears a Village of the
Damned expression and asks you to repeat almost everything you say.

4 Culture Jam

Your fourteen-year-old finishes his meal in silence and excuses himself
to the tent, where he scavenges for magazines and, finding none, just
konks out. There are no signs of life. The kids' senses have become so
deadened from disuse they can't touch, taste, smell or see that they are
in a marvelous place. To them it doesn't feel marvelous. It doesn't feel
like anything at all.

If you have read Elisabeth Kiibler-Ross, you will recognize that the
stages your kids are going through — denial, anger, depression, bargain-
ing — closely mimic the stages of grief, as if they are adjusting to a loss.
Which in a real way they are: the loss of their selves. Or rather, the loss
of the selves that feel most authentic to them. Their mediated selves.
Those selves that, when disconnected from the urban data stream, cease
to function.

Your family, like most postmodern clans, finds itself adrift at a his-
torically significant time. The last couple of centuries have marked a
radical transition in human lifestyle. We've gone from living in a natural
world to living in a manufactured one. For two million years our per-
sonalities and cultures were shaped by nature. The generations alive
today — who cannot recognize an edible mushroom in the forest or
build a fire without matches— are the first to have had their lives shaped
almost entirely by the electronic mass media environment.

Most of us are now fully detached from the natural world. We can
barely remember the last time we drank from a stream, smelled wild
skunk cabbage or saw the stars from a dark remove, well away from the
city. We can't remember when we last spent an evening telling stories,
instead of having Jerry or Oprah or Rosie tell stories to us. We can't
identify three kinds of tree, but we know how much Mike Tyson
received for his last fight. We can't explain why the sky is blue, but we
know how many times Susan Lucci has been passed over for a Daytime
Emmy Award.

This detachment from nature may not seem like much of a prob-
lem, but it is. In fact, it's a disaster. In her 1994 book Bird by Bird, writer
Anne Lamott reflects on a California vineyard in early fall. It is "about as
voluptuous a place as you can find on earth: the sense of lushness and

b Culture Jam

abundance; the fullness of the clumps of grapes that hang, mammarian,
and give off an ancient autumnal smell, semiprotected from the sun by
their leaves. The grapes are so incredibly beautiful that you can't help
but be thrilled. If you aren't — if you only see someone's profit or that in
another month there will be rotten fruit all over the ground — someone
has gotten inside your brain and really fucked you up." I think she has it
right. Someone has gotten into our brains. Now the most important
task on the agenda is to evict them and recover our sanity.

Rediscovering the natural world ought not to be difficult. It ought
to be an instinctive act. Not just in random bursts of virtuousness
should we be moved to replace our divots. If the Earth felt less like
something out there and more like an extension of our bodies, we'd care
for it like kin. We'd engage in what German philosopher Immanuel
Kant called "beautiful acts" rather than "moral acts." We'd pull in the
direction of global survival not because we felt duty-bound to do so,
but because it felt right and good. At a 1990 conference titled "Psychol-
ogy As If the Whole Earth Mattered" at Harvard University's Center for
Psychology and Social Change, panelists concluded, "If the self is
expanded to include the natural world, behavior leading to destruction
of this world will be experienced as self-destruction."

Sounds promising. But don't hold your breath.

To "ecopsychologist" Theodore Roszak, our rampant, oblivious
consumption at the expense of the planet is, simply, a sickness — one no
less harmful than the disorders catalogued in the Diagnostic and Statis-
tical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM IV), the encyclopedia of mod-
ern psychiatric complaint. It's too new a phenomenon for psychologists
to have given much consideration to it.

Roszak views the current widespread sense of malaise as a kind of
"separation anxiety" from nature. It should be an easy metaphor to con-
nect with. We're bombarded these days with analyses of failed relation-
ships, of the psychological havoc that breakups wreak. The psychological
fallout from our breakup with nature is like that. When you cut off arte-
rial blood to an organ, the organ dies. When you cut the flow of nature
into people's lives, their spirit dies. It's as simple as that.

Mood Disorders 7

Yet, most of us remain strangers to "beautiful acts."

The postmodern family, out there in the woods trying to bond,
can't adapt to real time, real trees and real conversation, because real life
has become an alien landscape. Mom and Dad can't navigate in it. No
one really feels they belong. No one feels any sense of purpose. The
spaced-out daughter is alive when she's in front of the TV, and the
mopey son is alive when he's surfing the Net, and Mom and Dad are
alive when they're at work. Meanwhile, in real, hairy-ass nature, con-
crete things keep intruding on their consciousness, breaking their
media trance: the rumble of the nearby creek, the prick of mosquitoes
on their ankles, the subsequent sight of their own blood.

Living inside the postmodern spectacle has changed people. Figu-
ratively, most of us spend the majority of our time in some ethereal
place created from fantasy and want. After a while, the hyperreality of
this place comes to seem normal. Garishness, volume, glitz, sleazy
excess — the American esthetic H. L. Mencken called "the libido of the
u gly" — becomes second nature. "The environment" consists of what
you see around you — the ambient spectacle. Occasionally, you'll bump
into an outsider bearing tales of that other environment, the one you
may have known. When an Inuit elder is asked to draw a picture of the
local coastline, he will close his eyes and listen to the sound of the waves
on the shore. Such stories seem vaguely ludicrous. Who could be that
attuned to the land? More to the point, who'd want to be? Where's the
purpose in denying yourself civilized amenities when you don't have to?

Once you start asking questions like this, you are, of course, in real
trouble. The moment you fail to understand why the natural world
might have any relevance in the day-to-day lives of human beings, you
become, to quote my old physics teacher, "a lost ball in the high weeds."
Abandon nature and you abandon your sense of the divine. More than
that, you lose track of who you are.

THE ECOLOGY OF MIND

"Is everybody crazy?" Writer Jim Windolf posed the question in an
October 1997 issue of The New York Observer, and then answered it

If you add up all the psychological ailments Americans complain
of, the portrait that emerges is of a nation of basket-cases. Ten million
suffer from Seasonal Affective Disorder. Fourteen million are alcoholics.
Fifteen million are pathologically socially anxious. Fifteen million are
depressed. Three million suffer panic attacks. Ten million have Border-
line Personality Disorder. Twelve million have "restless legs." Five mil-
lion are obsessive/compulsive. Two million are manic-depressive. Ten
million are addicted to sex. Factoring in wild-card afflictions like
Chronic Fatigue Syndrome and multiple chemical sensitivity, and
allowing for overlap (folks suffering from more than one problem),
Windolf concluded that "77 percent of the adult population is a mess."
With a couple of new quantifiable disorders, "everybody in the country
will be officially nuts."

His cheeky point is that Americans are turning into annoyingly
self-absorbed hypochondriacs. Why? Because they can. Go ahead and

10 Culture Jam

cry, says the prevailing psychological wisdom. Any trifling discomfort
you might feel has been legitimized. Your pain is valid. If you think
you're sick, you are.

There may be a grain of truth to this. People who live in a time rel-
atively free of crises, amidst widespread peace and a galloping economy,
will sometimes manufacture crises, inflating minor irritants into major
traumas. But surely there's more to the story than that. I think what we
have here is a labeling problem. An awful lot of people are feeling down
and they don't know why. Something is draining their energy, addling
their brains — but they don't know what.

Fact: Worldwide rates of major depression in every age group
have risen steadily since the 1940s. Rates of suicide, unipolar disorder,
bipolar disorder and alcoholism have all climbed significantly. The
U.S. has a higher rate of depression than almost every other country,
and cross-cultural data show that as Asian countries Americanize,
their rates of depression increase accordingly. Moreover, recent
research by the American National Institute of Mental Health con-
firms that "mood disorders" have increased in each successive genera-
tion throughout the twentieth century. I don't usually trust such
statistics, but casual observation seems to bear the trend out. Is it just
me or is every parent now weighing the merits of Ritalin? Their kids
are hyper, unfocused, inattentive. They cannot stay "on task." Mom
and Dad aren't faring much better. Tempers are short, attentions wan-
der. Many people — and I include myself in this group — seem to be
experiencing higher highs and lower lows these days. We soar the skies
one moment, then feel slack and depressed the next.

Why might this be happening? Some researchers blame environ-
mental pollutants: chemical agents in the air, water or food. Others
point to cultural and economic factors that are increasing the stress in
our everyday lives. No one knows for sure.

But it's tantalizing to guess. In Saul Bellow's novel Humboldt's Gift,
the narrator wonders how it is that Americans can unashamedly claim
to be "suffering," when compared to the rest of the world they are
immensely blessed. His answer is that while most people tend to associ-

The Ecology of Mind 11

ate suffering with scarcity and deprivation, there's a very different kind
of suffering that's caused by plenitude.

Plenitude is American culture's perverse burden. Most Americans
have everything they could possibly want, and they still don't think
it's nearly enough. When everything is at hand, nothing is ever hard-
won, and when nothing is hard-won, nothing really satisfies. Without
satisfaction, our lives become shallow and meaningless. In this era of
gigantism — corporate megamergers, billion-dollar-grossing films and
grande lattes — we embrace the value of More to compensate for lives
that seem, somehow, Less. Eat the instant you're hungry and, as the
Buddhist master put it, "You will never find out what your hunger is
for." Plenitude feeds the malaise as it fills the stomach.

In the last quarter century the insatiable craving for the con-
sumer culture's big, big show has only grown stronger. To meet the
demand, media spectacles have colonized our mental environment,
crowding out history and context. In their place there is now only a
flood of disconnected information: The market is soaring, the planet
is warming, this fall's hemlines are knee-high, there's a famine in East
Africa.

Could it be that all of these things together — the curse of pleni-
tude, the image explosion, the data overload, the hum of the media that,
like Denny's, are always awake and bustling — are driving us crazy? I lay
my money here. More than anything else, it is our mediated, consumption-
driven culture that's making us sick.

Look at the way most of us relax. We come home after work,
exhausted. We turn on the TV— a reflex. (If we live alone, we may sim-
ply be craving the simulacrum of another human presence.) We sit
there passively hour after hour, barely moving except to eat. We
receive but we do not transmit. Identical images flow into our brains,
homogenizing our perspectives, knowledge, tastes and desires. We
watch nature shows instead of venturing out into nature. We laugh at
sitcom jokes but not at our spouse's. We spend more evenings enjoy-
ing video sex than making love ourselves. And this media-fed fantasy
changes us. (Remember the hoodlum Alex in A Clockwork Orange,

12 Culture Jam

undergoing behavior-modifying aversion therapy via hours and hours
of graphic sex and violence on TV? For him the boundaries blurred.
"The colors of the real world only become real," he noticed, "when you
viddy them in a film.") Layer upon layer of mediated artifice come
between us and the world until we are mummified. The commercial
mass media are rearranging our neurons, manipulating our emotions,
making powerful new connections between deep immaterial needs
and material products. So virtual is the hypodermic needle that we
don't feel it. So gradually is the dosage increased that we're not aware
of the toxicity.

Relatively speaking, this is all very new — too new for its effect on
the species to be fully known. We're still adjusting to the all-pervasive
media. We are the first two or three generations in history to grow up
in a predominantly electronic environment. It took humans thousands
of generations to adapt to living on the land (our "natural environ-
ment") so it's reasonable to assume it will take dozens of generations to
adapt to the new electronic mass media environment that's rapidly
replacing the "natural" one. The wild mood swings and the barely
repressed anger may simply be symptoms of a shock our systems are
experiencing. We are new evolutionary beings, panting for breath on
an electronic beach.

We still haven't answered the most basic questions — such as how
media violence affects children — let alone the big-picture issues, such as
what happens to a whole culture when its citizens start spending half
their waking lives in virtual environments. We know there's a correla-
tion between TV viewing and voter apathy (the more TV you watch, the
less likely you are to participate in the direct democratic process). We
know that TV viewing is linked to childhood obesity (and to the extent
that body image erodes self-esteem, we can get an idea of the degree to
which TV addiction is harmful to the average child). Beyond that, we're
largely guessing. We don't really know what psychological or physiolog-
ical mechanisms are at work. And because we don't know, to a great
extent — and this is the truly odd and scary part — we don't worry much
about it.

The Ecology of Mind 13

Ten years ago we didn't think twice about the chemicals in our
food or the toxins generated by industry; we thought they were "well
within acceptable limits." We were dead wrong about that and today
we may be repeating the same mistake with "mental pollution" — non-
chalantly absorbing massive daily doses of it without a second
thought. Our mental environment is a common-property resource
like the air or the water. We need to protect ourselves from unwanted
incursions into it, much the same way we lobbied for nonsmoking
areas ten years ago.

The antismoking lobby succeeded because people knew without
being told that cigarettes were killing their friends and families. They
demanded hard data about the risks of breathing in secondhand smoke.
They disbelieved glib assurances that cigarettes were safe and that the
right to smoke superseded the right to breathe clean air. They trusted
their passion and their rage.

More important, antismoking activists changed our idea of what
smoking is all about. They uncooled the cigarette companies and their
brands, forever connecting smoking and death in all of our minds. It
was, perhaps, the first victory in the fight for our mental environ-
ment — an ecology as rife with pollutants as any befouled river or cloud
of smog. We long ago learned to watch what we dump into nature or
absorb into our bodies; now we need to be equally careful about what
we take into our minds.

What follows is just a beginning, an introduction to some of the
mental pollutants and information viruses we deal with daily — a survey
of the threats to our "ecology of mind."

Noise

In 1996, the World Health Organization declared noise to be a signifi-
cant health problem, one that causes physiological changes in sleep,
blood pressure and digestion. It's now understood that noise doesn't
have to be loud to do damage.

For thousands of generations, the ambient noise was rain and

14 Culture Jam

wind and people talking. Now the sound track of the world is vastly
different. Today's noise is all-spectrum, undecodable. More and more
people suffer the perpetual buzz of tinnitus — a ringing in the ears
caused by exposure to a loud noise (or in some cases, just by aging).
One of the treatments for tinnitus is to fit sufferers with a hearing aid
that broadcasts white noise. The brain learns to interpret white noise
as a background distraction, like traffic sounds, and filters it out along
with the tinnitus. The brain works that way for the rest of us as well.
The "whiter" the sound in our environment gets, the more we dismiss
it as background and stop hearing it. Ultimately, everything becomes
background noise and we hear almost nothing.

Noise is probably the best understood of the mental pollutants.
It's really the only one to which the term "mental pollution" has
already been applied. From the dull roar of rush-hour traffic to the
drone of your fridge to the buzz coming out of your computer, vari-
ous kinds of noise (blue, white, pink, black) are perpetually seeping
into our mental environment. To make matters worse, the volume is
constantly being cranked up. Two, perhaps three generations have
already become stimulation addicted. Can't work without back-
ground music. Can't jog without a Discman. Can't study without the
TV on. Our neurons are continuously massaged by Muzak and the
hum of monitors. The essence of our postmodern age may be found
in that kind of urban score. Trying to make sense of the world above
the din of our wired world is like living next to a freeway — you get
used to it, but at a much diminished level of mindfulness and well-
being.

Quiet feels foreign now, but quiet may be just what we need.
Quiet may be to a healthy mind what clean air and water and a
chemical-free diet are to a healthy body. In a clean mental environ-
ment, we may find our mood disorders subsiding. It's no longer easy
to manufacture quietude, nor is it always practical to do so. But there
are ways to pick up the trash in your mindscape: Switch off the TV set
in your dentist's waiting room. Lose that noisy fridge. Turn off the
stereo. Put your computer under the table. Poet Marianne Moore

The Ecology of Mind 15

contends that the deepest feeling always shows itself in silence. I think
she's got it right.

Jolts

A noise is a jolt, but a jolt isn't necessarily a noise. In broadcasting
terms, a jolt is any "technical event" that interrupts the flow of sound or
thought or imagery — a shift in camera angle, a gunshot, a cut to a com-
mercial. A jolt forces your mind to pump for meaning.

In 1978, when Jerry Mander first defined "technical events" in his
classic book Four Arguments for the Elimination of Television, regular
TV programming averaged ten technical events per minute and com-
mercials twenty (public television averaged three to four). Twenty
years later these figures have doubled. MTV delivers sixty events per
minute, and some viewers, still insufficiently jolted, seek more action
by roaming the channels. (Channel-surfers, ironically, are both the
cause and the effect of jolt hyperinflation. The more frequently view-
ers surf, the more broadcasters are inclined to fill their programming
with jolts to hold the attention of surfers. And surfers, conditioned to
expect ever-quicker jolts, become more inclined to surf.)

Why are jolts so inherently interesting? The behavioral psycholo-
gist Ivan Pavlov was among the first to try to explain this. Any stimulus
change — any jolt — releases hormones that trigger the biologically
encoded fight-or-flight response, vestigial from a time when survival
depended on being alert to anything in the environment that happened
at faster than normal or "natural" speed. The response was designed to
keep us from being eaten by cave bears. It was not designed to keep us
glued to our TV sets.

However, most TV programs do just that. They are scripted to
deliver the maximum number of jolts per minute (and keep viewers
suspended through the breaks). When you watch MTV, you are in fight-
or-flight mode practically the whole time. Random violence and mean-
ingless sex drop in out of the blue and without context. "Unlike news
reports or thematic TV programs, which usually prepare the viewer for

16 Culture Jam

violent scenes," concluded a 1995 study on the psychological aspects of
MTV viewing, "the abruptness of music-video cuts tends to have
greater shock effect . . . and may have more detrimental influence on the
viewer." Much has been made of the way toddlers will sit mesmerized
before shows like Teletubbies, but put a baby in front of MTV and you'll
see the same level of rapture. It's an innate response, one that the indus-
try has been quick to exploit.

In the early 1980s, technological advances changed the way films
were made. Up to that point, filmmaking was a painstaking process of
finding the organic shape of the story, then developing the narrative by
weaving together the components, literally splicing strips of 16mm or
35mm film together by hand. National Film Board of Canada founder
John Grierson's adage "Everything is beautiful if you get it in the right
order" was understood to be a kind of occupational law. Today, new
video-editing techniques allow filmmakers to take shortcuts. If there is a
structural problem in your story, well, you can just mask it with a jolt.
You can solve a continuity problem by simply bamboozling the audi-
ence, briefly scrambling their brains. Story editing has become more
and more a process of "jolt management." If you can create enough
jolts, you have an engaging film.

That's the premise the commercial media operate on today. Keep
the jolts coming. Keep audiences on the edge and sell their attention
spans to the advertiser before they regain their bearings. What's a
postmodern spectacle after all, if not an array of carefully orchestrated
jolts?

Is it possible to have too many jolts? Yes. When the levels rise above
a certain threshold, the viewer/listener stops pumping for meaning and
just surrenders to the flow, to being both entertained and paralyzed.
The narrative of actual life is suspended for the duration of the show.

Perhaps the time has come to quantify the consequences of such
mental pollution. If psychologists studied the impact of noise and jolt
levels in our mental environment the way biologists research the effects
of chemicals in our air, water and food, perhaps we could determine
how much our brains can safely absorb. We could then compare the

The Ecology of Mind 17

risks posed by different mental environments. We could compare living
in Los Angeles with living in Portland, or growing up in North America
with growing up in Australia. We could create a "livability" index more
accurate than the ones that simply measure greenspace, minimum wage
and the number of schools.

With reliable mental-environment indexes, we could rate TV pro-
grams and stations by how many jolts per hour they manufacture, how
much clutter they dump into the public mind and how this may be
affecting our mental health. We could then set new agendas: to reduce,
not increase, the number of jolts our brains absorb.

Shock

The average North American witnesses five acts of violence (killings,
gunshots, assaults, car chases, rapes) per hour of prime time network
TV watched. Such statistics are now more likely to prompt yawns than
gasps. They don't mean much if we don't distinguish between types of
violence — pro wrestling versus Goodfellas versus Indonesian cops club-
bing student demonstrators on the evening news. Experts can't even
seem to agree on whether violence on TV is increasing. Two recent
studies turned up conflicting results, and the head of one research
team, by way of explanation, mumbled something about flawed
methodology.

So the stats are confusing. That hardly means harm is not being
done.

The first agenda of the commercial media is, I believe, to sell fear.
What the "news" story of a busload of tourists gunned down in Egypt
and the cop show about widespread corruption on the force have in
common is that they contribute to the sense that the world is a menac-
ing, inhospitable, untrustworthy place. Fear breeds insecurity — and
then consumer culture offers us a variety of ways to buy our way back to
security.

As for sex in the media, there seems — surprise — to be as big a
bull market as ever. TV programmers know what stops us from zap-

18 Culture Jam

ping the channels: pouting lips, pert breasts, buns of steel, pneumatic
superyouth.

TV sexuality is a campaign of disinformation, much like TV news.
The truth is stretched, the story is hyped. If you look like a TV star or a
model, a desirable mate will be available to you; if you don't, it wont. Try
telling me that living with that message your whole life hasn't changed
the way you feel about yourself.

Growing up in an erotically charged media environment alters the
very foundations of our personalities. I think it distorts our sexuality. It
changes the way you feel when someone suddenly puts their hand on
your shoulder, hugs you, or flirts with you through the car window. I
think the constant flow of commercially scripted pseudosex, rape and
pornography makes us more voyeuristic, insatiable and aggressive —
even though I can't prove it with hard facts.

Similarly, I have no hard proof that daily exposure to media vio-
lence shapes the way you feel about crime and punishment, or affects
the way you feel about that guy standing next to you at the bus stop.
What I do know is that my natural instinct for spontaneity, camaraderie
and trust has been blunted. I used to pick up hitchhikers; now I hardly
ever do. I rarely speak to strangers anymore.

TV programming is inundated by sex and violence because the
networks have determined they are an efficient way to produce audi-
ences. The commercial media are to the mental environment what fac-
tories are to the physical environment. A factory dumps pollutants into
the water or air because that's the most efficient way to produce plastic
or wood pulp or steel. A TV or radio station "pollutes" the cultural envi-
ronment because that's the most efficient way to produce audiences. It
pays to pollute. The psychic fallout is just the cost of putting on the
show.

Hype

Advertisements are the most prevalent and toxic of the mental pollu-
tants. From the moment your radio alarm sounds in the morning to the

The Ecology of Mind 19

wee hours of late-night TV, microjolts of commercial pollution flood
into your brain at the rate of about three thousand marketing messages
per day. Every day, an estimated 12 billion display ads, 3 million radio
commercials, and more than 200,000 TV commercials are dumped into
North America's collective unconscious.

Corporate advertising (or is it the commercial media?) is the
largest single psychological project ever undertaken by the human
race. Yet for all of that, its impact on us remains unknown and largely
ignored. When I think of the media's influence over years, over
decades, I think of those brainwashing experiments conducted by Dr.
Ewen Cameron in a Montreal psychiatric hospital in the 1950s. The
idea of the CIA-sponsored "depatterning" experiments was to outfit
conscious, unconscious or semiconscious subjects with headphones,
and flood their brains with thousands of repetitive "driving" messages
that would alter their behavior over time. Sound familiar? Advertising
aims to do the same thing. Dr. Cameron's guinea pigs emerged from
the Montreal trials with serious psychological damage. It was a great
scandal. But no one is saying boo about the ongoing experiment of
mass media advertising. In fact, new guinea pigs voluntarily come on
board every day.

The proliferation of commercial messages has happened so
steadily and relentlessly that we haven't quite woken up to the absurdity
of it all. No longer are ads confined to the usual places: buses, bill-
boards, stadiums. Anywhere your eyes can possibly come to rest is now
a place that, in corporate America's view, can and ought to be filled with
a logo or product message.

You reach down to pull your golf ball out of the hole and there, at
the bottom of the cup, is an ad for a brokerage firm. You fill your car
with gas, there's an ad on the nozzle. You wait for your bank machine
to spit out money and an ad pushing GICs scrolls by in the little win-
dow. You drive through the heartland and the view of the wheatfields is
broken at intervals by enormous billboards. Your kids watch Pepsi and
Snickers ads in the classroom. (The school has made the devil's bargain
of accepting free audiovisual equipment in exchange for airing these

20 Culture Jam

ads on "Channel One.") You think you've seen it all, but you haven't. An
Atlanta-based marketing firm announces plans to send an inflatable
billboard filled with corporate logos into geostationary orbit viewable
every night like a second moon. British sprinter Linford Christie
appears at a press conference with little panthers replacing the pupils
of his eyes, where his sponsor's logo has been imprinted on specially
made contact lenses. New York software engineers demonstrate a pro-
gram that turns your cursor into a corporate icon whenever you visit a
commercial site. A Japanese schoolboy becomes a neon sign during his
daily two-hour subway commute by wearing a battery-powered vest
promoting an electronics giant. Administrators in a Texas school dis-
trict announce plans to boost revenues by selling ad space on the roofs
of the district's seventeen schools — arresting the attention of the fifty-
eight million commercial jet passengers who fly into Dallas each year.
Kids tattoo their calves with swooshes. Other kids, at raves, begin wear-
ing actual bar codes that other kids can scan, revealing messages such
as "I'd like to sleep with you." A boy named David Bentley in Sydney,
Australia, literally rents his head to corporate clients, shaving a new ad
into his hair every few weeks. ("I know for sure that at least two thou-
sand teenagers at my high school will read my head every day to see
what it says," says the young entrepreneur. "I just wish I had a bigger
head.") You pick up a banana in the supermarket and there, on a little
sticker, is an ad for the new summer blockbuster at the multiplex. ("It's
interactive because you have to peel them off," says one ad executive of
this new delivery system. "And people look at ten pieces of fruit before
they pick one, so we get multiple impressions.") Boy Scouts in the U.K.
sell corporate ad space on their merit badges. An Australian radio sta-
tion dyes its logo on two million eggs. IBM beams its logo onto clouds
above San Francisco with a scanning electron microscope and a laser —
the millennial equivalent of Commissioner Gordon summoning Bat-
man to the Batcave. (The image is visible from ten miles away.)
Bestfoods unveils plans to stamp its Skippy brand of peanut butter
onto the crisp tabula rasa of a New Jersey beach each morning at low
tide, where it will push peanut butter for a few hours before being

The Ecology of Mind 21

washed away by the waves. (The company is widely commended for its
environmental responsibility.) Coca-Cola strikes a six-month deal
with the Australian postal service for the right to cancel stamps with a
Coke ad. A company called VideoCarte installs interactive screens on
supermarket carts so that you can see ads while you shop. (A company
executive calls the little monitors "the most powerful micromarketing
medium available today.")

A few years ago, marketers began installing ad boards in men's
washrooms on college campuses, at eye level above the urinals. From
their perspective, it was a brilliant coup: Where else is a guy going to
look? But when I first heard this was being done, I was incensed. One of
the last private acts was being co-opted. "What's been the reaction on
campus?" I asked the reporter who told me the story. "Not much reac-
tion," he said. It became apparent, as these ad boards began springing
up in bars and restaurants, and just about anywhere men stand to pee,
that not only did guys not share my outrage, they actually welcomed a
little diversion while nature took its course.

This flood of psycho-effluent is spreading all around us, and we
love every minute of it. The adspeak means nothing. It means worse
than nothing. It is "anti-language" that, whenever it runs into truth and
meaning, annihilates it.

There is nowhere to run. No one is exempt and no one will be
spared. In the silent moments of my life, I often used to hear the open-
ing movement of Beethoven's Ninth Symphony play in my head. Now I
hear that kid singing the Oscar Meyer Wiener song.

Unreality

At a recent Adbusters Media Foundation office party, two young guys
walked in the door, grabbed a beer and went straight to the computers,
where they surfed the Net for two hours. Except for a few minutes here
and there when people came up behind them and commented on
something, they had no social interaction whatsoever. I know these
guys. They are both very bright. They'd score well up there on IQ tests.

22 Culture Jam

But I wondered how they'd score on a "reality index" — which I define as
the ratio of time spent in a virtual versus a "real" environment. The
measurement is easy enough to calculate. Jot down in a notebook the
number of times a day you laugh at real jokes with real people in real
situations against the number of times you laugh at media-generated
jokes, the amount of sex you have against the amount of sex you watch,
and so on.

As psychoenvironmental indexes go, it might be quite revealing.

We face more and more opportunities and incentives to spend
time in cyberspace or to let the TV do the thinking. This is "unreality":
a mediated world so womblike and seductive, it's hard not to conclude
it's a pretty nice place to be. In that world of unreality, it's easy to forget
you're a citizen and that the actual world is an interactive place. The
other day as I sat staring at my toaster, waiting for a bagel to pop up, I
suddenly felt as if I was about to receive a jolt. There's a kind of internal
"clock" that people who work with computers develop. There's a finite
amount of time you're allowed to be still and silent (before, for exam-
ple, the screensaver kicks in), so you develop a sixth sense that tells you
when that time is up. It occurred to me, looking at the toaster, that I had
not moved a mouse or a cursor for about a minute, and I had the dis-
tinct feeling I was about to be "dumped" off-line. I was going to lose my
connection. Then the bagel popped up, jarring me back to the sensory
world. The smell reached my nose and I thought of the old Woody Allen
line, in a paraphrase: Whatever you think of reality, it's still the only
place to get a good toasted bagel.

Erosion of Empathy

A wave of shock is striking society that is so new we don't yet have a
name for it. It was concocted by advertisers who saw that consumers
had become too jaded and media-sawy to respond to mere sexual titil-
lation or intellectual games. The new shock ads go straight to the soul.
They aren't clever or coy so much as deeply, morbidly unsettling. Adver-
tising Age columnist Bob Garfield calls them "advertrocities." Benetton's

The Ecology of Mind 23
dying AIDS patients and dead Bosnian soldiers. Calvin Klein models
drowsing in shooting galleries with hunted, heroin-hollowed eyes.
Diesel jeans' cryptic "ads within ads," set in North Korea, featuring
images of skinny models on the side of a bus packed with (presumably)
starving, suffering locals. ("There's no limit to how thin you can get,"
says the ad on the bus.)

I think these ads are operating on a deeper level than even the
advertisers themselves know or understand. Their cumulative effect
is to erode our ability to empathize, to take social issues seriously, to
be moved by atrocity. They inure us to the suffering (or joy) of
other people. They engender an attitude of malaise toward the things
that make us most human. We pretend not to care as advertisers exca-
vate the most sacred parts of ourselves, and we end up actually not
caring.

The first time we saw a starving child on a late-night TV ad, we
were appalled. Maybe we sent money. As these images became more
familiar though, our compassion evaporated. Eventually, these ads
started to repulse us. Now we never want to see another starving child
again. Our sensitivity to violence has been eroded by the same process
of attrition; likewise our sexual responsiveness.

There was a time when Claudia Schiffer in her Guess? jeans got our
attention. Now she and her supermodel ilk hardly raise an eyebrow, and
real people look downright asexual. The motherboard of our libido has
been reseeded.

This blunting of our emotions is a self-perpetuating process. The
more our psyches are corroded, the more desensitized we become to the
corrosive. The more indifferent we become, the more voltage it takes to
shock us. On it goes, until our minds become a theater of the absurd,
and we become shockproof.

Information Overload

There is more information in the Sunday New York Times than the aver-
age person living during the Renaissance would have absorbed in a life-

24 Culture Jam

time. The information glut, the so-called data smog hanging low in the
valleys, calls to mind the bewildered student's lament: "I don't need to
know any more— I already know more than I can understand." Infor-
mation overload gave William Gibson's Johnny Mnemonic something
called the "black shakes." That's a science fiction conceit, but anyone
who ever bought a satellite dish or logged onto the Lexis/Nexis database
can surely identify.

"Most information has long stopped being useful for us," wrote
Neil Postman, the author of Amusing Ourselves to Death. "Informa-
tion has become a form of garbage. It comes indiscriminately —
directed at no one in particular, disconnected from usefulness; we are
swamped by information, have no control over it and do not know
what to do with it. And the reason we don't is that we no longer have
a coherent conception of ourselves, our universe and our relation to
one another and our world. We do not know where we came from,
where we are going or why we are going there. We have no coherent
framework to direct our definition of our problems or our search for
their solutions. Therefore, we have no criteria for judging what is
meaningful, useful, or relevant information. Our defenses against the
information glut have broken down; our information immune system
is inoperable."

I nf otoxi n s

If we now absorb a surreal quantity of information, then the quality of
that information is even more disturbing. The reality presented to us by
the media always has a spin on it. Ads stretch the truth, news bites give
only part of the story, and White House press releases are carefully tai-
lored to make the president look good. We are constantly being hyped,
suckered and lied to.

The marketers, spin doctors and PR agents who produce this pro-
paganda realize what we as a society hate to admit: Disinformation
works.

Do an overwhelming number of respected scientists believe that

The Ecology of Mind 25

human actions are changing the Earth's climate? Yes. OK, that being the
case, let's undermine that by rinding and funding those few contrarians
who believe otherwise. Promote their message widely and it will accu-
mulate in the mental environment, just as toxic mercury accumulates in
a biological ecosystem. Once enough of the toxin has been dispersed,
the balance of public understanding will shift. Fund a low-level cam-
paign to suggest that any threat to the car is an attack on personal free-
doms. Create a "grassroots" group to defend the right to drive. Portray
anticar activists as prudes who long for the days of the horse and buggy.
Then sit back, watch your infotoxins spread — and get ready to sell big-
ger, better cars for years and years to come.

Can we come up with antidotes to these infoviruses that infect our
minds? The answer may depend on how much we've ingested of the
most powerful and persistent infotoxin of them all: cynicism.

Loss of Infodiversity

Information diversity is as critical to our long-term survival as biodi-
versity. Both are parts of the bedrock of human existence. And so,
when one man gains control of more than half a country's daily news-
papers (as is the case with Conrad Black in Canada), or amasses a
global media empire the size of Rupert Murdoch's, it's a serious prob-
lem; the scope of public discourse shrinks. When a handful of media
megacorporations control not only the daily newspapers and TV air-
waves but the magazine, book publishing, motion picture, home
video and music industries as well, information and cultural diversity
both plummet.

A 1998 survey of eleven- to fifteen-year-old boys and girls in a
school in Kathmandu revealed that their favorite TV program was MTV
and the most popular radio station was Hits FM, a western music chan-
nel. Few of the students ever watched Nepal Television or India's Door-
darshan. In a dozen Asia- Pacific countries surveyed by the A. C. Nielsen
company the same year, Coke was the favorite drink in eleven (in Thai-
land, the favorite drink was Pepsi). In downtown London, Bangkok,

26 Culture Jam

Tokyo or Los Angeles, you will invariably see a McDonald's restaurant
on one corner, a Benetton store on the other and a bunch of transna-
tional corporate logos across the street.

Cultural homogenization has graver consequences than the same
hairstyles, catchphrases, music and action-hero antics perpetrated ad
nauseam around the world. In all systems, homogenization is poison.
Lack of diversity leads to inefficiency and failure. The loss of a lan-
guage, tradition or heritage — or the forgetting of one good idea— is as
big a loss to future generations as a biological species going extinct.

An Environmental Movement
of the Mind

"There was once a town in the heart of America where all life seemed to
live in harmony with its surroundings . . . Then a strange blight crept
over the area and everything began to change."

The fictitious town that fell prey to this "strange illness" in Rachel
Carson's famous environmental manifesto Silent Spring is a kind of
Everytown, U.S.A. Once there was fecundity and the happy buzz of
diverse life. Then human intervention caught up with nature. In this
quiet season, no chicks hatched. The cattle and sheep sickened and died.
No birds returned; the farmers spoke of much illness in their families.
"It was," Carson says, "a spring without voices."

No witchcraft, no enemy action or natural catastrophe silenced the
rebirth of new life in this stricken world. The people did it themselves —
with chemicals and pesticides.

The language and the metaphors Carson used thirty years ago
apply equally well to the mental environment we have created for our-
selves today. A single voice fills Everytown now; at its say-so, all the
sheep lie down in sync. Life in this stricken, alien world has not so much
been silenced as reengineered.

We cannot continue polluting our minds. We cannot allow adver-
tisers to continue preying on our emotions. We cannot allow a handful

The Ecology of Mind 27

of media conglomerates to seize control of the global communications
superstructure. Silent Spring and other books and documentaries of its
time shocked us into realizing that our natural environment was dying,
and catalyzed a wave of activism that changed the world. Now it's time
to do the same for our mental environment.

MEDIA VIRUS

Twenty-five years ago, when the world had not quite lost all of its inno-
cence and idealism, I was living in a film commune, churning out
experimental films — short five- to ten-minute cultural commentaries.
All the members of our commune were fascinated with film and its
seemingly magical power to change the world. We showed our shorts to
small groups around the Pacific Northwest for a couple of years, but
yearned for wider exposure. It occurred to us to condense some of our
most incisive efforts into thirty- and sixty-second TV spots and air
them as paid "uncommercial" messages. In those days, a local thirty-
second timeslot after midnight cost only about $50. Even we could
afford that. I walked into the network headquarters of the Canadian
Broadcasting Corporation with a few hundred dollars in my pocket and
tried to buy some airtime. The sales department was on the second
floor of a tawdry downtown Vancouver building. I remember feeling
intimidated and eventually being laughed out of the office. "I don't
know what this is," the manager in charge of sales told me as he looked
over our storyboards, "but it's not a commercial."

I thought it was strange that a citizen willing to pay couldn't buy

30 Culture Jam

airtime on Canada's public broadcasting system. I sent a letter to the
Canadian Radio-Television and Telecommunications Commission —
Canadian broadcasting's governing body — asking about the rights of
citizens to access the public airwaves. I got a very polite letter back say-
ing basically that the whole area was murky, that networks had some
rights, individuals had some rights, the law was inconclusive on this
point, blah, blah, blah. And that was that. I moved on to a career in doc-
umentary filmmaking and the free speech issue slipped to the back of
my mind — until 1989.

That year, British Columbia's logging industry, its image rapidly
tarnishing, launched a multimillion-dollar PR campaign. Bus-stop
posters went up all over Vancouver, and every night when I switched on
my TV there was another smooth pitch explaining the wonderful job
the industry was doing managing the forests. This slick series of spots,
produced by one of the biggest ad agencies in town, always ended with
the upbeat reassurance that we British Columbians need have no fear.
Our forests were in good hands, they were being well managed, and we
would have "Forests Forever." This slogan spread like an infovirus
throughout the province.

Those British Columbians who knew what was really happening in
the forests were livid. The industry was blatantly lying. In truth, the
forests of B.C. and the Pacific Northwest have a history of appalling
management. For years the timber companies (whose executives held
the view that a tree is just an unemployed log) cut too much old-growth
too quickly and without proper public consultation. Consequently, the
hills were scarred with clear-cuts, and salmon runs were contaminated
and dying. There had been mass demonstrations and civil disobedience
to stop this liquidation of the Earth's richest temperate rain forests.

So a group of us — including myself, wilderness cinematographer
Bill Schmalz and half a dozen other environmental activists — came up
with our own campaign. "Mystical Forests" tried to tell the other side of
the story: The industry was logging at an unsustainable rate and the
future of forestry in our province was in jeopardy.

When we tried to buy airtime for our ad, the TV stations turned us

Media Virus 31
down. At the CBC, the same sales manager who had laughed me out of
his office fifteen years earlier again wouldn't take our money (this time
he did not laugh). He refused "Mystical Forests" even while he contin-
ued to sell airtime to the "Forests Forever" campaign. It seemed ludi-
crous, undemocratic, and it made us furious.

We mobilized in retaliation. We issued press releases, hounded
journalists and protested in front of forest company headquarters.
There were editorials in the local papers, TV news coverage, appear-
ances on radio talk shows — and suddenly the forest company executives
were backpedaling. Their promise of "Forests Forever" caved in under
scrutiny. We popped their multimillion-dollar PR bubble right in their
faces and suddenly the CBC was on the defensive as well. Hundreds of
British Columbians phoned the CBC's head office demanding to know
why environmentalists couldn't buy airtime whereas the forest industry
could.

A few weeks later, unexpectedly, the CBC had a change of heart.
They never did air our spot, but they pulled the "Forests Forever" cam-
paign — a major loss of face for the industry and a big boost for the
environmentalists. Many British Columbians — some for the first
time — started having doubts about what was really happening in their
forests, and, more to the point, started seriously questioning what was
being sold on TV as truth.

We'd beaten the forest industry at its own game — on a budget of
zero. We felt euphoric, and that heady mood gave birth to the Adbusters
Media Foundation (usually just called Adbusters or the Media Founda-
tion). We decided to produce more TV campaigns about the seminal
issues of our time, and to insist on our right to purchase commercial
airtime for those issues. We also launched the media activist networking
magazine Adbusters, and, a little later, the Culture Jammer's Campaign
Headquarters on the World Wide Web (www.adbusters.org).

We produced the "Autosaurus" TV campaign (a takedown of the
auto industry involving a rampaging dinosaur made of scrap cars),
"Obsession Fetish" (a critique of the fashion industry featuring a
bulimic Kate Moss look-alike), "TV Turnoff Week" (a yearly campaign

32 Culture Jam

encouraging TV abstinence) and "Buy Nothing Day" — and all of them
were systematically, repeatedly rejected by not only the CBC but by all
the North American TV networks, including the big three: NBC, CBS
and ABC. (CNN would eventually air the "Buy Nothing Day" ad, but
only after a pit bull terrier of a Wall Street Journal reporter put pressure
on the network to justify its refusal.) Now, these are not crummy low-
budget commercials that offended the networks' delicate sensibilities.
They're effective and professional. The networks could not and did not
object to how they looked. They objected to what they said.
And the stonewalling continues to this day.

Sometimes the hypocrisy is maddeningly blatant. Every Christmas
season, the airwaves are full of consumption messages as our culture
embarks on another whirlwind buying binge. But year after year the big
three networks have refused to sell us airtime for our "Buy Nothing
Day" announcement.

Over the years, I've spent dozens of hours arguing with the net-
work executives about why they're censoring us. Here's what some of
them have had to say in their own defense:

"There's no law that says we have to air anything — we'll decide
what we want to air or not."

— ABC New York station manager Art Moore

"We don't want to take any advertising that's inimical to our
legitimate business interests."

— NBC network commercial clearance manager Richard Gitter

"I dare you to get any station manager in this town to air your
message."

— CBS network's Libby Hawkins in New York

"We don't sell airtime for issue ads because that would allow the
people with the financial resources to control public policy."

— CBS Boston public affairs manager Donald Lowery

Media Virus 33

"This commercial ["Buy Nothing Day"] . . . is in opposition to
the current economic policy in the United States."
— CBS network's Robert L. Lowary

I get a creepy sense of d6ja vu listening to remarks like that. I was
born in Estonia, where for fifty years during Soviet rule people were not
allowed to speak up against the government. There simply were no
media channels for debating controversial public issues because the
government did not want such discussion to take place. Soviet dissi-
dents used to talk about a "public sphere of discourse" that was missing
from their country. The oppression of that era was rightly decried. Ulti-
mately, a lot of Westerners watched the Soviet Union fall apart with
some sense of vindication.

In North America today there's a similar public void. There's a lack
of media space in which to challenge consumptive, commercial and
corporate agendas. In the former Soviet Union you weren't allowed to
speak out against the government. In North America today you cannot
speak out against the sponsors.

This inability to speak up, this public information void, extends
across all media at every level. Young reporters who cut their teeth on
small-town newspapers invariably swap stories about how they ran
into a wall the moment they tried to do real investigative work. The
tales often go something like this: There's a smelter or a pulp mill on
the outskirts of town. It employs a lot of the townsfolk and donates a
lot of money to good causes. Unfortunately, it's an environmental
nightmare: For years it's been dumping heavy metals into streams
and poisoning the aquifer. The reporter tries to ferret out the facts.
She calls the company's media liaison, who blows her off. She calls up
that guy's boss, who fails to call back. The next day the publisher
takes the reporter into her office and tells her to drop the story. "That
company is an esteemed member of the community," she says. "Every
year they buy a huge color supplement, and they host the annual
summer barbecue that all the other advertisers attend. So just drop it.
There are plenty of other things to write about. Look: They're paint-

34 Culture Jam

ing the tennis courts tomorrow. Go find the essential drama in that
story."

And up the chain it goes.

The looming presence of big advertisers influences, if only subcon-
sciously, every executive decision made in every newsroom across
North America. Ninety percent of news editors surveyed in a 1992 Mar-
quette University study said they'd experienced "direct pressure" from
advertisers trying to influence content; more than a third admitted they
had, at some point, caved in and done what the advertisers wanted.
Important advertisers are stroked with "soft" pieces designed to move
product while important stories are buried.

The most high-minded, ethically intentioned networks and publi-
cations are not above striking Faustian pacts.

The PBS flagship NewsHour, which is underwritten by Archer
Daniels Midland, conveniently ignored the agribusiness giant's price-
fixing scandal throughout 1995.

The New Yorker magazine recently cut a deal with Crystal Cruises,
wherein the magazine agreed to send seven of its high-profile writers
and editors on a world cruise aboard a Crystal cruiseliner (the staffers
are required to give some on -board lectures). Its back thus scratched,
Crystal agreed to buy six full pages of ad space in the magazine, and it
promptly began promoting the cruise ("The New YorkerGoes to Sea!"),
aiming its ads at rich travelers hoping to gain a little wit and sophistica-
tion by osmosis.

Where will all this dirty dancing eventually lead us? The answer
may lie in cyberspace, where objective "news" stories already feature
hypertext links to advertising merchants. Book giant Barnes & Noble
pays The New York Times and the Los Angeles Times to send readers who
click on highlighted titles directly to the store's virtual headquarters
(where they can order the book themselves).

With this precedent set, many observers predict the full infiltration
of commercial forces into all on-line content. You'll read an obituary of
country crooner John Denver and grow nostalgic. But here's relief:
Double-click on "Rocky Mountain High" and you'll find yourself at the

Media Virus 35
virtual headquarters of the record company selling a boxed set of Den-
ver's greatest hits. You like the sound of a company mentioned in a busi-
ness story on Silicon Valley start-ups? Why not buy the stock from this
on-line brokerage house? Just double-click here.

In 1997, Chrysler, one of the five largest advertisers in the U.S., sent
letters to one hundred newspaper and magazine editors demanding to
review their publications for stories that could prove damaging or con-
troversial. "In an effort to avoid potential conflicts, it is required that
Chrysler corporation be alerted in advance of any and all editorial con-
tent that encompasses sexual, political, social issues or any editorial
content that could be construed as provocative or offensive." According
to a spokesperson at Chrysler, every single letter was signed in agree-
ment and returned. This kind of editorial control is widely, quietly
practiced throughout the industry.

In today's media environment, advertisers rule — the sponsor is
king. That ideology is now so entrenched within media circles as to have
become an unspoken operational code. Lessons about power, privilege
and access are learned at the lower levels by young writers who take this
received wisdom with them as they move up the media ladder. From the
smallest community weeklies to the big city and national dailies, from
Forbes and Details and Cosmo to the NBC, ABC and CBS networks, our
whole social communications system is rotten to the core.

f PN5uNfcR'5rA FoR BEGIMNER5

Sidewalk BubbleguM ©«9S Cli^BuHen

THE MANCHURIAN CONSUMER

On America's Funniest Home Videos, two young men set up a high bench
under the basketball hoop. Then one of them comes racing into the
frame, leaps off the bench, stuffs the ball and exits stage left, triumphant.
The second fellow tries to repeat the feat, with less luck. He barrels in,
misses his footing and straddles the bench, hard. There is a roar of
laughter. People in the studio audience are literally doubled over with
mirth. You suddenly realize you're chuckling too.

But what, exactly, is so funny? The pratfall was hardly surprising:
Groin injuries are the very denominator of this show. It's not Buster
Keaton material. In fact, the stunt was so obviously set up, the hapless
kid so obviously a dupe sacrificed at the altar of brief nationwide TV
exposure that the authentic response should probably have been pity.
Or shame.

And yet you laughed. You laughed because all the cues told you to.
The laugh track and the audience reaction shot double-teamed you.
Mostly, you laughed because some network executive in a corner office
in Burbank gets paid $500,000 a year to make sure you do. You laughed
in the same places that the live studio audience laughed, give or take a

38 Culture Jam

little after-the-fact digital modification. The bell rang and you salivated.
(Network executives get very nervous about comedies without the sign-
posting of a computer-generated laugh track, which is why such shows
are rare. "I come from a place where getting a laugh from an audience is
a rather sacred and holy thing," said writer Aaron Sorkin, while trying to
sell reluctant ABC brass on a laugh-trackless format for his new show
called Sports Night. "To make one up by pushing a button on a com-
puter bothers me in a place I don't like to be bothered.")
Zap.

It's Friday night and you're watching that old classic Risky Business.
A preposterously young-looking Tom Cruise is wearing Ray'Ban Way-
farers, just like yours. Is this a coincidence? The movie came out around
about the time your sense of cool was embryonic. You don't remember
making a conscious choice about eyewear. The fact is, though, that
when it came time to buy sunglasses, you chose RayBan. And you still
wear them and you still think they're sharp. So you begin to wonder
about this product-placement thing. Just how many other commodity
signs are slipping into the Hollywood image stream and influencing
your purchasing decisions? The laptop computer you picked up last
year. Isn't that the one they used to save the world in Independence Day 7 .
The Dr Pepper you just bought on impulse. Didn't Forrest Gump drink
that stuff?

It used to be jarring to see an actor reach for a Heineken or bring
home a tub of Baskin-Robbins ice cream. It meant that reality was
intruding on the generic dream world, and it broke the spell. But prod-
uct placements are everywhere in movies now. (Most people peg the
birth of product placement as a full-blown trend to the trail of Reese's
Pieces the little alien laid down in E.T., in 1982.) Yet because they're
everywhere, they're nowhere. You don't really notice them. Just as you
probably don't notice brand names in novels or songs. All fictions
grounded in the facts of our life are an easier sell. We'll believe a charac-
ter who drinks Miller before we'll believe a character who drinks "beer."

What this means is that we're now ripe for manipulation. We can
be buzzed by logos without noticing. This is not so different from being

The Manchurian Consumer 39

buzzed by a laugh track. We've backgrounded these things and — at least
consciously — tuned them out. We've given up mental control. To
whom? To the dozens of entertainment marketing agencies in the U.S.
that specialize in moving products into (and out of!) scripts before
movies are ever shot. They act as middlemen between culture and com-
merce. They spin like lathes behind the scenes so that you don't even
think to ask why, for instance, there was only one reference to Nike in
Jerry Maguire — a movie shot through with the Nike ethos of athlete
commodification. (The answer: because Reebok paid Tristar Pictures a
million and a half bucks for merchandising, advertising and promotion
of its product.)

Some companies pay for placement, others don't. So you don't
know if the Coke in the frame just happens to be there or if someone
paid $100,000 to put it there. You don't know how to distinguish
between the story narrative and the corporate-cultural narrative. What
does it mean when you don't know? What does it do to your cultural
gyrostabilizers, your sense of where, and who, you are?

Zap.

It's August 31, 1997. You catch the breaking news about the death
of Princess Diana. Frankly, you couldn't care less about the monarchy,
but there was something about plucky Di's style that you liked. You fol-
low the saturation TV coverage: the aftermath, the analysis, the condo-
lences, the funeral. Elton John sings a lachrymose tune and you find
yourself weeping in front of your set. It's the middle of the night. The
"people's princess" is dead.

Something very odd is happening. You're crying, but you can't
locate the source of your tears. It occurs to you that you cried less when
some real people you knew — friends and even family members — died.
And yet you're crying now. It's crazy. And you're not alone. The global
"grieving" for Diana borders on mass hysteria. A lot of people, pressed
to articulate why they're so sad, admit they're not sad for Di so much as
they're sad for the idea of being genuinely sad for someone like her — in
the way that teenagers will sometimes admit to being in love with being
in love.

40 Culture Jam

In death Princess Di has become a legend. More than that, she has
become a cultural signifier, like the swoosh or the Golden Arches. She
has what French new-wave philosopher Jean Baudrillard called "com-
modity sign value." Her face became paired in our minds with all the
good things: compassion, humility, philanthropy, love. She had become
the quintessential heroine of our culture, what we all wanted to be. For
fifteen years, she dressed herself for the media and sold herself publicly,
flirting with the camera (even as she claimed to despise the photogra-
phers), and for fifteen years we consumed her. She created the unforget-
table media moments that primed the tears we cried in front of the TV
set. When we bought Di, we bought the brand, not the product.

Zap.

Take stock of your life. Look around at what you drive, wear, eat,
smoke, read. Are these things you 7 . Would an anthropologist, given a pile
of all your material possessions, be able to assemble an accurate portrait
of your personality? Would that portrait reflect a true original or a
"type"? That laugh you laughed while watching the basketball player get
nutted, and those tears you cried for Diana, were they real? Were they
authentic?

If they weren't, you may find yourself wondering: What else about
me isn't authentic? Do I really like diamonds? Do I find my partner
attractive? Do I actually prefer single-malt scotch? Why am I scared to
travel to Egypt? Are the myriad daily choices I make, apparently freely,
truly the product of my own will?

Richard Condon's 1959 novel, The Manchurian Candidate — which
was turned into a movie Pauline Kael called "the most sophisticated
political satire ever to come out of Hollywood" — tells the story of an
American soldier who is captured during the Korean War, shipped to
Manchuria and groomed, via brainwashing, to become a robotic assas-
sin programmed to kill the U.S. president upon a predetermined verbal
command.

The subtext of the movie is that Americans are being depatterned
by propaganda systems they may not understand or even be aware of.
The modern consumer is indeed a Manchurian Candidate living in a

The Manchurian Consumer 41

trance. He has a vague notion that at some point early in his life, exper-
iments were carried out on him, but he can't remember much about
them. While he was drugged, or too young to remember, ideas were
implanted into his subconscious with a view to changing his behavior.
The Manchurian Consumer has been programmed not to kill the pres-
ident, but to go out and purchase things on one of a number of prede-
termined commands.

Slogans now come easily to his lips. He has warm feelings toward
many products. Even his most innate drives and emotions trigger
immediate connections with consumer goods. Hunger equals Big Mac.
Drowsiness equals Starbucks. Depression equals Prozac.

And what about that burning anxiety, that deep, almost forgotten
feeling of alarm at his lost independence and sense of self? To the
Manchurian Consumer, that's the signal to turn on the TV.

POSTHUMAN

I know a young man who has spent the last few years surfing the elec-
tronic media. His whole existence has become a surfin' safari. Nothing is
more or less important than anything else. He's supernatural now. He
picks up a book, skims a sentence. Looks at a bit of this and a bit of that.
He absorbs everything, but not deeply. Everything is nonlinear. Nothing
can be sustained — not his interest in his job or his colleagues, not even
his marriage: If it's not going well, his first instinct is to surf away.

In related news, a colleague recently watched his upstairs neighbor
undergo a slow personality shift. It began when she discovered a partic-
ular chat group on the Internet. Her mild curiosity about this new
world grew into a full-fledged addiction. Day and night she jumped in
and out of conversations with strangers on one topic or another. These
strangers, who may or may not use their real names or genders, who
may or may not tell the truth, came to seem almost like friends. She
knew some of them as if they were family.

She lost ten pounds after discovering this chat group — because she
forgot to eat. "Sometimes I go out," she'd say, but she didn't mean "out"
out, she meant "out" of that chat group and into another site some-

44 Culture Jam

where else on the Net. She was reluctant to sleep because she might miss
an interesting thread. One time my friend saw her on the street, and she
hadn't showered in four days.

Now she's a very smart woman, but her addiction — she calls it that
herself— changed her. She grew so accustomed to typing her thoughts
that her verbal skills suffered. She spoke too quickly, running her words
together so that it all sounded like one long word. Her eyes were fixed
and liquid and her teeth were a strange color. She behaved erratically.
She vacuumed at all hours. At one point she considered getting another
e-mail address under another name, so she could "flame" herself.

A psychologist might diagnose this woman as being in the early
stages of some dissociative disorder. But she's still fairly grounded com-
pared to others who have more fully immersed themselves in cybercul-
ture.

All across the Net, people (mostly young men) haunt cyberhang-
outs called MUDs (Multiple-User Domains), where role-playing fan-
tasy games are always in progress. These places are as complex and
esoteric as the imaginations of the players allow. They are "transforma-
tive," in that they let the user determine the outcome.

In her book Life on the Screen, American psychoanalyst Sherry
Turkle describes one young man, an inveterate webcrawler, who's a
character in six MUDs at the same time. In each MUD he is a different
person: a teenage girl, a history professor, a dog, an Arthurian knight, a
cyborg and William S. Burroughs. In none of them is he actually him-
self. Yet each persona has come to feel as real to him as his "real" self.
When not directly participating in one group, he sometimes puts that
self to "sleep." The character is still in the game, can interact with other
players on a superficial level via artificial- intelligence programs, and can
summon the real guy back to assume his MUD alter ego via a "page" if
something exciting is about to happen.

Reading this story about mediated self-constructions reminded
me of an article Ann Beattie wrote for Esquire about ten years ago. She
had tagged along with a bunch of Japanese tourists on a bus ride
through San Francisco. What struck her was the way the passengers,

Post hum an 45

confronted with scenes of beauty or recognizable iconography (like the
Golden Gate Bridge), reflexively put their cameras to their eyes. Only
when these things were thus "framed" did they become valid. Only
when they were memorialized on film did they live. This, I think, is the
hazardous fallout from an overmediated world, where nothing that
happens becomes real until you can make it fit into the spectacle, or
make the spectacle fit into it. "I knew a Californian who read his poetry
aloud at parties until his friends learned to silence him," writes anthro-
pologist Edmund Carpenter in his book Oh, What a Blow That Phan-
tom Gave Me! "But when he played recordings of these same poems,
everybody listened." The Situationists might say such tales, as they accu-
mulate, mark the end of authentic experience, and therefore the end of
the authentic self.

Perhaps there's no such thing as an authentic self. Maybe Walt
Whitman was right: We contain multitudes. Part child, part adult.
Androgynes. Cyborgs. We understand intuitively that machines are
becoming more like humans, and now via the promise of virtual reality
we have the opportunity to meet machines halfway.

The MUD aficionados Sherry Turkle investigates in her books tend
to use the Net to create bigger and better (nonauthentic) selves. They
often use it to beef up the parts of their lives that are failing in the real,
concrete world. In Life on the Screen, we meet Matthew, the nineteen-
year-old son of a distant, alcoholic dad. In actual life his girlfriend had
dumped him, but on the Net his chivalrous MUD persona was enor-
mously attractive to women. Then we meet Gordon, who likewise
invests his on-line characters with "qualities he's trying to develop in
himself." The game, Turkle concludes, "has heightened his sense of self
as a work in progress."

Turkle coins the term "slippages" to refer to "places where persona
and self merge, where the multiple personae join to comprise what the
individual thinks of as his or her authentic self." MUD addicts end up
inhabiting a world somewhere between real life and virtual life. It's too
real to be a game, yet too artificial to be real. They hover in "the gap."

To a lesser extent the same could be said of all of us creatures of the

46 Culture Jam

media age- — which is why a mortal's entry into the world of MUDs
seems like a good metaphor for our immersion into what Turkle calls
"the culture of simulation." A place where a word like "authenticity"
may no longer even apply.

If you spend enough time in cyberspace, emote commands start
taking the place of emotions. "Emoticons" — those cunning little side-
ways faces typed with punctuation marks — substitute for real smiles
and frowns. Over time, the computer drives out what we thought was
an innate art: living through all of our senses. In her short story "Web
Central," Fay Weldon paints a portrait of a dystopic future along these
lines: The privileged classes sit alone in sealed rooms with computer
terminals, their moods regulated intravenously.

The idea that spending a lot of time in cyberspace might have an ill
effect on mental health has until recently been intuitively sensible but
hard to prove. In August 1998, findings of the first concentrated study
of the social and psychological effects of the Internet, a two-year effort
by Carnegie Mellon University, were released. The results? Netheads
were lonelier and more depressed than the average population. You'd
guess that it might be because the lonely and depressed tend to gravitate
to the Net. But that wasn't so. "Participants who were lonelier and more
depressed, as determined by standard questionnaires at the start of the
. . . study, were no more drawn to the Internet than those who were orig-
inally happier and more socially engaged. Instead, Internet use itself
appeared to cause a decline in psychological well-being." "Connect, dis-
connect" may be our generation's answer to "Tune in, turn on, drop
out."

Eventually, and perhaps sooner rather than later, there lies a world
where most human beings are simply incapable of experiencing the
emotions that life ought to evoke. Whatever they see or hear or taste, no
matter how raw and beautiful, will promptly be pillaged for its usable
constituent parts. And of course, once an emotion is corrupted, it can
never be wncorrupted.

In John Irving's novel A Prayer for Owen Meany, the family matri-
arch dies in front of the television, rigor mortis sets in and her thumb is

Post hum an 47
fixed on the remote. They find her body in front of the live set, the
remote endlessly scanning the channels. It's a prophetic image. As we
travel deeper into corporate-driven cyberspace, similar haunting figures
loom on our own horizon. Fractured humans are laid waste in front of
their wall-size TV-cyberscreens. Their attention spans flicker near zero,
their imaginations have given out and they can no longer remember the
past. Outside, the natural world has all but vanished and the social
order is breaking down. The citizens of this new world order are
trapped inside their living rooms, roaming the thousand-channel uni-
verse and exercising the one freedom they still have left: to be the
voyeurs of their own demise.

winter

THE CULT YOU'RE IN

A beeping truck, backing up in the alley, jolts you out of a scary
dream — a mad midnight chase through a supermarket, ending with a
savage beating at the hands of the Keebler elves. You sit up in a cold
sweat, heart slamming in your chest. It was only a nightmare. Slowly,
you reintegrate, remembering who and where you are. In your bed, in
your little apartment, in the very town you grew up in.

It's a "This Is Your Life" moment — a time for mulling and stock-
taking. You are still here. Just a few miles from the place you had your
first kiss, got your first job (drive-through window at Wendy's), bought
your first car (73 Ford Torino), went nuts with the Wild Turkey on
prom night and pulled that all-nighter at Kinko's, photocopying tran-
scripts to send to the big schools back East.

Those big dreams of youth didn't quite pan out. You didn't get into
Harvard, didn't get courted by the Bulls, didn't land a recording con-
tract with EMI (or anyone else), didn't make a million by age twenty-
five. And so you scaled down your hopes of embarrassing riches to
reasonable expectations of adequate comfort — the modest condo
downtown, the Visa card, the Braun shaver, the one good Armani suit.

52 Culture Jam

Even this more modest star proved out of reach. The state college
you graduated from left you with a $35,000 debt. The work you found
hardly dented it: dreadful eight-to-six days in the circulation depart-
ment of a bad lifestyle magazine. You learned to swallow hard and just
do the job — until the cuts came and the junior people were cleared out
with a week's severance pay and sober no-look nods from middle man-
agement. You began paying the rent with Visa advances. You got call-
display to avoid the collection agency.

There remains only one thing no one has taken away, your only real
equity. And you intend to enjoy fully that Fiat rustmaster this weekend.
You can't run from your problems, but you may as well drive. Road
Trip. Three days to forget it all. Three days of living like an animal (in
the best possible sense), alert to sights and sounds and smells: Howard
Stern on the morning radio, Slumber Lodge pools along the 1-14. "You
may find yourself behind the wheel of a large automobile," sings David
Byrne from a tape labeled "Road Tunes One." The Fiat is, of course, only
large at heart. "You know what FIAT stands for?" Liv said when she first
saw it. "Fix It Again, Tony." You knew then that this was a girl you could
travel to the ends of the Earth with. Or at least to New York City.

The itinerary is set. You will order clam chowder from the Soup
Nazi, line up for standby Letterman tickets and wander around Times
Square (Now cleaner! Safer!) with one eye on the Jumbotron. It's a place
you've never been, though you live there in your mind. You will jog in
Battery Park and sip Guinness at Michael's Pub on Monday night
(Woody Allen's night), and you will dance with Liv in the Rainbow
Room on her birthday. Ah Liv, who when you first saw her spraying
Opium on her wrist at the cosmetics counter reminded you so much of
Cindy Crawford — though of late she's put on a few pounds and now
looks better when you close your eyes and imagine.

And so you'll drive. You'll fuel up with Ho Ho's and Pez and Evian
and magazines and batteries for your Discman, and then you'll bury the
pedal under your Converse All-Stars — like the ones Kurt Cobain died in.
Wayfarers on, needle climbing and the unspoken understanding that you
and Liv will conduct the conversation entirely in movie catchphrases.

The Cult You're In 53

"Mrs. Nixon would like you to pass the Doritos."

"You just keep thinking, Butch. That's what you're good at."

"It's over, Rock. Nothing on Earth's gonna save you now."

It occurs to you that you can't remember the last time Liv was just
Liv and you were just you. You light up a Metro, a designer cigarette so
obviously targeted at your demographic . . . which is why you steered
clear of them until one day you smoked one to be ironic, and now you
can't stop.

You'll come back home in a week. Or maybe you won't. Why
should you? What's there to come back fori On the other hand, why
should you stay?

A long time ago, without even realizing it, just about all of us were
recruited into a cult. At some indeterminate moment, maybe when we
were feeling particularly adrift or vulnerable, a cult member showed up
and made a beautiful presentation. "I believe I have something to ease
your pain." She made us feel welcome. We understood she was offering
us something to give life meaning. She was wearing Nike sneakers and a
Planet Hollywood cap.

Do you feel as if you're in a cult? Probably not. The atmosphere is
quite un-Moonielike. We're free to roam and recreate. No one seems to
be forcing us to do anything we don't want to do. In fact, we feel privi-
leged to be here. The rules don't seem oppressive. But make no mistake:
There are rules.

By consensus, cult members speak a kind of corporate Esperanto:
words and ideas sucked up from TV and advertising. We wear uni-
forms — not white robes but, let's say, Tommy Hilfiger jackets or Airwalk
sneakers (it depends on our particular subsect). We have been recruited
into roles and behavior patterns we did not consciously choose.

Quite a few members ended up in the slacker camp. They're
bunked in spartan huts on the periphery, well away from the others.
There's no mistaking cult slackers for "downshifters" — those folks who
have voluntarily cashed out of their high-paying jobs and simplified
their lives. Slackers are downshifters by necessity. They live frugally

54 Culture Jam

because they are poor. (Underemployed and often overeducated, they
may never get out of the rent-and-loan-repayment cycle.)

There's really not much for the slackers to do from day to day. They
hang out, never asking, never telling, just offering intermittent wry
observations. They are postpolitical, postreligious. They don't define
themselves by who they vote for or pray to (these things are pretty much
prescribed in the cult anyway). They set themselves apart in the only
way cult members can: by what they choose to wear and drive and listen
to. The only things to which they confidently ascribe value are things
other people have already scouted, deemed worthy and embraced.

Cult members aren't really citizens. The notions of citizenship and
nationhood make little sense in this world. We're not fathers and moth-
ers and brothers: We're consumers. We care about sneakers, music and
Jeeps. The only Life, Freedom, Wonder and Joy in our lives are the brands
on our supermarket shelves.

Are we happy? Not really. Cults promise a kind of boundless con-
tentment — punctuated by moments of bliss — but never quite deliver
on that promise. They fill the void, but only with a different kind of
void. Disillusionment eventually sets in — or it would if we were allowed
to think much about it. Hence the first commandment of a cult: Thou
shalt not think. Free thinking will break the trance and introduce com-
peting perspectives. Which leads to doubt. Which leads to contempla-
tion of the nearest exit.

How did all this happen in the first place? Why have we no mem-
ory of it? When were we recruited?

The first solicitations began when we were very young. If you close
your eyes and think back, you may remember some of them.

You are four years old, tugging on your mother's sleeve in the
supermarket. There are products down here at eye level that she cannot
see. Cool products with cartoon faces on them. Toys familiar from Sat-
urday morning television. You want them. She keeps pushing her cart.
You cry. She doesn't understand.

You are eight. You have allowance money. You savor the buying
experience. A Coke here, a Snickers bar there. Each little fix means not

The Cult You're In 55
just getting what you want, but power. For a few moments you are the
center of attention. You call the shots. People smile and scurry around
serving you.

Michael Jordan goes up on your bedroom door. He is your first
hero, throwing a glow around the first brand in your life — Nike. You
wanna be like Mike.

Other heroes follow. Sometimes they contradict each other.
Michael Jackson drinks Pepsi but Michael Jordan drinks Coke. Who is
the false prophet? Your friends reinforce the brandhunting. Wearing the
same stuff and hearing the same music makes you a fraternity, united in
soul and form.

You watch TV. It's your sanctuary. You feel neither loneliness nor
solitude here.

You enter the rebel years. You strut the malls, brandishing a Dr
Pepper can full of Scotch, which you drink right under the noses of the
surveillance guards. One day you act drunk and trick them into "arrest-
ing" you — only this time it actually is soda in the can. You are
immensely pleased with yourself.

You go to college, invest in a Powerbook, ride a Vespa scooter, don
Doc Martens. In your town, a new sports complex and performing arts
center name themselves after a car manufacturer and a software com-
pany. You have moved so far into the consumer maze that you can smell
the cheese.

After graduating you begin to make a little money, and it's quite
seductive. The more you have, the more you think about it.

You buy a house with three bathrooms. You park your BMW out-
side the double garage. When you grow depressed you go shopping.

The cult rituals spread themselves evenly over the calendar: Christ-
mas, Super Bowl, Easter, pay-per-view boxing match, summer
Olympics, Mother's Day, Father's Day, Thanksgiving, Halloween. Each
has its own imperatives — stuff you have to buy, things you have to do.

You're a lifer now. You're locked and loaded. On the go, trying to
generate more income to buy more things and then, feeling dissatisfied
but not quite sure why, setting your sights on even greater income and

The Cult You're In 57

more acquisitions. When "consumer confidence is down," spending is
"stagnant," the "retail sector" is "hurting" and "stingy consumers are
giving stores the blues," you do your bit for the economy. You are a star.

Always, always you have been free to dream. The motivational
speakers you watched on late-night TV preached that even the most
sorry schleppers can achieve their goals if they visualize daily and stay
committed. Think and grow rich.

Dreams, by definition, are supposed to be unique and imaginative.
Yet the bulk of the population is dreaming the same dream. It's a dream
of wealth, power, fame, plenty of sex and exciting recreational opportu-
nities.

What does it mean when a whole culture dreams the same dream?

CONSUMPTION

WILL F1LLTHEVOID

THE END OF THE AMERICAN DREAM

The past always looks better through the lens of nostalgia. It's human
nature to exaggerate how good things once were, how happy everyone
was. But in postwar America, things really were pretty good. And despite
everything we've learned about that era since, people really were fairly
happy. A prosperous consumer culture had developed. We bought what
we needed, with cash. We tucked away 10 percent of what we earned. We
amused ourselves. We read. In summers Mom and Dad took the clan
camping on the dunes. This was the American dream: a sprinkler on
every lawn, a car in every driveway, a chicken in every pot.

But somewhere along the line, the dream soured. The messages we
received grew darker and came faster. The television stayed on all day
and the kids logged astonishing hours in front of it. Companies
merged and began laying people off. Personal debt grew. People gob-
bled takeout and started getting fat. Malls, not churches, teemed with
families on Sunday mornings. A few critics sounded the alarm that an
unencumbered lifestyle of acquisition and consumption would exact its
price in the end, but the critics were seen as do-gooders, party poopers,
intellectual weenies. Enemies of the American Way.

60 Culture Jam

Now, at the dawn of the third millennium, those early warnings
look prophetic. Something has gone terribly wrong. On the surface, life
in America is much more stimulating than it was in the '50s. But people
are oddly dysphoric. Restless. Unfulfilled. Deadened. Something has
happened to us. Something has been taken from us. Our world seems
an almost cartoonish distortion of the world we once knew. The family
car can't get onto the turnpike for gridlock. The grass is a green not
found in nature. Uncle Walter is on a cocktail of pills. Aunt Nellie,
aluminum-pot cooking queen, can't remember where she lives. Mom's
on Prozac. Mary- Lou's bulimic. Last we heard of Dad he was running a
pyramid scheme in Phoenix.

Even in "good" neighborhoods — wealthy neighborhoods, gated
neighborhoods, your neighborhood — women don't jog alone after
dusk. News agencies report that crime rates are falling, but no one feels
safer than they did five years ago. In the inner cities, pensioners double-
bolt the doors in fear of home invasions, and a trip to the grocery store
seems as menacing as a night in the jungle. In some buildings people
talk to the other tenants, but mostly they don't, because why get
involved?. Every loner arouses suspicions — was that a power saw you
heard in the upstairs apartment? — and there are more loners. The trust
that once forged community is almost gone. Who ripped the radio out
of your car while you slept last night? Your neighbors shrug; they didn't
see or hear a thing. You install The Club and an alarm. Someone
smashes the windshield anyway — a political statement, or maybe not.
You eventually buy a cheaper car and leave it unlocked. Some mornings
you find a street person sleeping in it. On those days you take the bus.

Before leaving for work, sunbelt urbanites tune in to the air-quality
report. During inversions, when the smog is trapped over the city, the
asthmatic are advised not to venture outside. Bike couriers wear nose-
and-mouth masks that make them look vaguely menacing, like Imper-
ial Stormtroopers. The tapwater is rust colored and it smells and tastes,
well, industrial. The city says the trace metals are within acceptable lim-
its, but sales of bottled water rise as people play it safe. Then a whole
family in California dies from designer water that's been spiked with

The End of the American Dream 61
benzene as a prank. In country after country, studies reveal that men's
sperm counts are falling. Nobody quite knows why.

A friend recently recounted a great urban legend. It was about a
grand country wedding on the Sunshine Coast of British Columbia. It
had been an affair to remember, the union of two well-off and respected
families. The reception was held in one of the locals' big, grassy back-
yards. There was a band, and one by one everyone got up to dance. It
turned out that septic pipes ran under that lawn. The weight of dozens
of guests bearing down was too much for the system, and the pipes
burst. Raw sewage rose up through the grass. It began to cover every-
one's shoes. If anybody noticed, they didn't say anything. The cham-
pagne flowed, the music continued. Until finally a little boy said, "It
smells like shit!" And suddenly everyone realized they were ankle-deep
in it.

I think of this story every time I try to explain the creeping dys-
function of North American life. It has happened so gradually that
hardly anyone has noticed. Those who have clued in apparently figure
it's best to ignore the shit and just keep dancing.

In 1945, America was one of history's great liberators. I was a kid in
Lubeck, Germany, when the GIs marched in. I still vividly remember
their "aw shucks" smiles and the magical way they pulled chewing gum
and Hershey bars from their pockets and handed them out to all us
kids. My father hailed them as the saviors of the world. Now, fifty years
later, America, the great liberator, is in desperate need of being liberated
from itself — from its own excesses and arrogance. And the world needs
to be liberated from American values and culture, spreading across the
planet as if by divine providence.

Yet the American dream is so seductive that most of us willingly
keep on dreaming. We continue to drive our cars to the supermarket
each week and idly wander the aisles, continue blithely to throw out our
weight in trash every few weeks, continue to assume that the additives
in our food are harmless shelf-life extenders, continue to play Visa
against MasterCard, continue to buy sneakers made in offshore sweat-
shops, and continue to sit sphinxlike in front of the tube most nights

A 24 Hour Moratorium on Consumer Spending

Nov, 26,1999

tin Ahead-Tjke ths PLungi' Find
uut whal it (His like In go ure whnle
day without ilispaiflfl n il open yauf
eyes to Hit way we Alt Liw.

Cfipy this f cstar. or download
posters irtT n-wff.scbujt"- 1 -: Dia
Pltl Ljiem up a I wart an your Iridpe.
or arywhe-f you llkr

Air Die TV oncovNTiEfcial in your
UHiununily. Vtatdi Quicktim« g;
Real Video vmioos ol iUI
www a dbusff rs or g

PARTICIPATE BY NOT PARTICIPATING!

The End of the American Dream 63

absorbing another dose of consumer-culture spectacle. The images
beckon us to a future in which maximum pleasure and minimum pain
are not only possible but inevitable. We yearn to realize the dream more
fully. We work and strive for the promised payoff. We try to catch the
river in a bucket. But we never will.

We have become what French sociologist Henri Lefebvre called "a
bureaucratic society of controlled consumption." Our culture has
evolved into a consumer culture and we from citizens to consumers.
Gratitude for what we have has been replaced by a sharpening hunger
for what we don't have. "How much is enough?" has been replaced by
"How much is possible?"

It has not been pretty to watch.

Over a twenty-year period, Elvis Presley evolved from the avatar of
American cool to the embodiment of American excess. Almost entirely
confined to bed in his last months, Elvis devoured pills and fried-
banana-and-peanut-butter sandwiches, suppressing the pain of being
Elvis and seemingly trying to lose himself inside his own expanding
girth. He was found, appropriately, dead on the throne, head down, like
an offensive lineman waiting for the snap. Three points of contact: his
fat hands on the tile and his ass on the porcelain.

There is no better metaphor for the old American dream. With a
few exceptions, we are all Elvis now. We have learned what it means to
live full-on, to fly and fornicate like an American, and now we refuse to
let that lifestyle go. So we keep consuming. Our bodies, minds, families,
communities, the environment — all are consumed.

THE UNOFFICIAL HISTORY OF AMERICA

The history of America is the one story every kid knows. It's a story
of fierce individualism and heroic personal sacrifice in the service of
a dream. A story of early settlers, hungry and cold, carving a home
out of the wilderness. Of visionary leaders fighting for democracy
and justice, and never wavering. Of a populace prepared to defend
those ideals to the death. It's the story of a revolution (an American
art form as endemic as baseball or jazz) beating back British imperi-
alism and launching a new colony into the industrial age on its own
terms.

It's a story of America triumphant. A story of its rise after World
War II to become the richest and most powerful country in the history
of the world, "the land of the free and home of the brave," an inspiring
model for the whole world to emulate.

That's the official history, the one that is taught in school and the
one our media and culture reinforce in myriad ways every day.

The unofficial history of the United States is quite different. It
begins the same way — in the revolutionary cauldron of colonial Amer-
ica — but then it takes a turn. A bit player in the official history becomes

66 Culture Jam

critically important to the way the unofficial history unfolds. This
player turns out to be not only the provocateur of the revolution, but in
the end its saboteur. This player lies at the heart of America's defining
theme: the difference between a country that pretends to be free and a
country that truly is free.

That player is the corporation.

The United States of America was born of a revolt not just against
British monarchs and the British parliament but against British corpo-
rations.

We tend to think of corporations as fairly recent phenomena, the
legacy of the Rockefellers and Carnegies. In fact, the corporate pres-
ence in prerevolutionary America was almost as conspicuous as it is
today. There were far fewer corporations then, but they were enor-
mously powerful: the Massachusetts Bay Company, the Hudson's Bay
Company, the British East India Company. Colonials feared these char-
tered entities. They recognized the way British kings and their cronies
used them as robotic arms to control the affairs of the colonies, to
pinch staples from remote breadbaskets and bring them home to the
motherland.

The colonials resisted. When the British East India Company
imposed duties on its incoming tea (telling the locals they could buy the
tea or lump it, because the company had a virtual monopoly on tea dis-
tribution in the colonies), radical patriots demonstrated. Colonial mer-
chants agreed not to sell East India Company tea. Many East India
Company ships were turned back at port. And, on one fateful day in
Boston, 342 chests of tea ended up in the salt chuck.

The Boston Tea Party was one of young America's finest hours. It
sparked enormous revolutionary excitement. The people were begin-
ning to understand their own strength, and to see their own self-
determination not just as possible but inevitable.

The Declaration of Independence, in 1776, freed Americans not
only from Britain but also from the tyranny of British corporations,
and for a hundred years after the document's signing, Americans
remained deeply suspicious of corporate power. They were careful

The Unofficial History of America™ 47

about the way they granted corporate charters, and about the powers
granted therein.

Early American charters were created literally by the people, for
the people as a legal convenience. Corporations were "artificial, invisi-
ble, intangible," mere financial tools. They were chartered by individ-
ual states, not the federal government, which meant they could be
kept under close local scrutiny. They were automatically dissolved if
they engaged in activities that violated their charter. Limits were
placed on how big and powerful companies could become. Even rail-
road magnate J. P. Morgan, the consummate capitalist, understood
that corporations must never become so big that they "inhibit free-
dom to the point where efficiency [is] endangered."

The two hundred or so corporations that were operating in the
U.S. by the year 1800 were each kept on a fairly short leash. They
weren't allowed to participate in the political process. They couldn't
buy stock in other corporations. And if one of them acted improperly,
the consequences were severe. In 1832, President Andrew Jackson
vetoed a motion to extend the charter of the corrupt and tyrannical
Second Bank of the United States, and was widely applauded for doing
so. That same year the state of Pennsylvania revoked the charters of
ten banks for operating contrary to the public interest. Even the enor-
mous industry trusts, formed to protect member corporations from
external competitors and provide barriers to entry, eventually proved
no match for the state. By the mid- 1800s, antitrust legislation was
widely in place.

In the early history of America, the corporation played an impor-
tant but subordinate role. The people — not the corporations — were
in control. So what happened? How did corporations gain power and
eventually start exercising more control than the individuals who cre-
ated them?

The shift began in the last third of the nineteenth century — the
start of a great period of struggle between corporations and civil soci-
ety. The turning point was the Civil War. Corporations made huge
profits from procurement contracts and took advantage of the disor-

68 Culture Jam

der and corruption of the times to buy legislatures, judges and even
presidents. Corporations became the masters and keepers of business.
President Abraham Lincoln foresaw terrible trouble. Shortly before
his death, he warned, "Corporations have been enthroned. ... An era
of corruption in high places will follow and the money power will
endeavor to prolong its reign by working on the prejudices of the peo-
ple .. . until wealth is aggregated in a few hands . . . and the republic is
destroyed."

President Lincoln's warning went unheeded. Corporations con-
tinued to gain power and influence. They had the laws governing their
creation amended. State charters could no longer be revoked. Corpo-
rate profits could no longer be limited. Corporate economic activity
could be restrained only by the courts, and in hundreds of cases
judges granted corporations minor legal victories, conceding rights
and privileges they did not have before.

Then came a legal event that would not be understood for
decades (and remains baffling even today), an event that would
change the course of American history. In Santa Clara County v.
Southern Pacific Railroad, a dispute over a railbed route, the U.S.
Supreme Court deemed that a private corporation was a "natural per-
son" under the U.S. Constitution and therefore entitled to protection
under the Bill of Rights. Suddenly, corporations enjoyed all the rights
and sovereignty previously enjoyed only by the people, including the
right to free speech.

This 1886 decision ostensibly gave corporations the same powers
as private citizens. But considering their vast financial resources, cor-
porations thereafter actually had far more power than any private cit-
izen. They could defend and exploit their rights and freedoms more
vigorously than any individual and therefore they were more free. In a
single legal stroke, the whole intent of the American Constitution —
that all citizens have one vote, and exercise an equal voice in public
debates — had been undermined. Sixty years after it was inked,
Supreme Court Justice William O. Douglas concluded of Santa Clara
that it "could not be supported by history, logic or reason." One of the

The Unofficial History of America™ 69
great legal blunders of the nineteenth century changed the whole idea
of democratic government.

Post- Santa Clara America became a very different place. By 1919,
corporations employed more than 80 percent of the workforce and
produced most of America's wealth. Corporate trusts had become too
powerful to legally challenge. The courts consistently favored their
interests. Employees found themselves without recourse if, for exam-
ple, they were injured on the job (if you worked for a corporation, you
voluntarily assumed the risk, was the courts' position). Railroad and
mining companies were enabled to annex vast tracts of land at mini-
mal expense.

Gradually, many of the original ideals of the American Revolu-
tion were simply quashed. Both during and after the Civil War, Amer-
ica was increasingly being ruled by a coalition of government and
business interests. The shift amounted to a kind of coup d'etat — not a
sudden military takeover but a gradual subversion and takeover of the
institutions of state power. Except for a temporary setback during
Franklin Roosevelt's New Deal (the 1930s), the U.S. has since been
governed as a corporate state.

In the post-World War II era, corporations continued to gain
power. They merged, consolidated, restructured and metamorphosed
into ever larger and more complex units of resource extraction, pro-
duction, distribution and marketing, to the point where many of
them became economically more powerful than many countries. In
1997, fifty-one of the world's hundred largest economies were corpo-
rations, not countries. The top five hundred corporations controlled
42 percent of the world's wealth. Today, corporations freely buy each
other's stocks and shares. They lobby legislators and bankroll elec-
tions. They manage our broadcast airwaves, set our industrial, eco-
nomic and cultural agendas, and grow as big and powerful as they
damn well please.

Every day, scenes that would have seemed surreal, impossible,
undemocratic twenty years ago play out with nary a squeak of dissent
from a stunned and inured populace.

70 Culture Jam

At Morain Valley Community College in Palos Hills, Illinois, a
student named Jennifer Beatty stages a protest against corporate
sponsorship in her school by locking herself to the metal mesh cur-
tains of the multimillion-dollar "McDonald's Student Center" that
serves as the physical and nutritional focal point of her college. She is
arrested and expelled.

At Greenbrier High School in Evans, Georgia, a student named
Mike Cameron wears a Pepsi T-shirt on the day — dubbed "Coke
Day" — when corporate flacks from Coca-Cola jet in from Atlanta to
visit the school their company has sponsored and subsidized. Mike
Cameron is suspended for his insolence.

In suburban shopping malls across North America, moms and
dads push shopping carts down the aisle of Toys "R" Us. Trailing them
and imitating their gestures, their kids push pint-size carts of their
own. The carts say, "Toys 'R' Us Shopper in Training."

In St. Louis, Missouri, chemical giant Monsanto sics its legal team
on anyone even considering spreading dirty lies — or dirty truths —
about the company. A Fox TV affiliate that has prepared a major
investigative story on the use and misuse of synthetic bovine growth
hormone (a Monsanto product) pulls the piece after Monsanto attor-
neys threaten the network with "dire consequences" if the story airs.
Later, a planned book on the dangers of genetic agricultural technolo-
gies is temporarily shelved after the publisher, fearing a lawsuit from
Monsanto, gets cold feet.

In boardrooms in all the major global capitals, CEOs of the
world's biggest corporations imagine a world where they are protected
by what is effectively their own global charter of rights and free-
doms — the Multinational Agreement on Investment (MAI). They are
supported in this vision by the World Trade Organization (WTO), the
World Bank, the International Monetary Fund (IMF), the Interna-
tional Chamber of Commerce (ICC), the European Round Table of
Industrialists (ERT), the Organization for Economic Co-operation
and Development (OECD) and other organizations representing
twenty-nine of the world's richest economies. The MAI would effec-

The Unofficial History of America™ 71

tively create a single global economy allowing corporations the unre-
stricted right to buy, sell and move their businesses, resources and
other assets wherever and whenever they want. It's a corporate bill of
rights designed to override all "nonconforming" local, state and
national laws and regulations and allow them to sue cities, states and
national governments for alleged noncompliance. Sold to the world's
citizens as inevitable and necessary in an age of free trade, those MAI
negotiations met with considerable grassroots opposition and were
temporarily suspended in April 1998. Nevertheless, no one believes
this initiative will remain suspended for long.

We, the people, have lost control. Corporations, these legal fic-
tions that we ourselves created two centuries ago, now have more
rights, freedoms and powers than we do. And we accept this as the
normal state of affairs. We go to corporations on our knees. Please do
the right thing, we plead. Please don't cut down any more ancient
forests. Please don't pollute any more lakes and rivers (but please don't
move your factories and jobs offshore either). Please don't use porno-
graphic images to sell fashion to my kids. Please don't play govern-
ments off against each other to get a better deal. We've spent so much
time bowed down in deference, we've forgotten how to stand up
straight.

The unofficial history of America™, which continues to be writ-
ten, is not a story of rugged individualism and heroic personal sacri-
fice in the pursuit of a dream. It is a story of democracy derailed, of a
revolutionary spirit suppressed, and of a once-proud people reduced
to servitude.

YOUR CORPORATE CONNECTION

Meet Janet, high school valedictorian, devoted daughter, middle-
distance track star. The almost perfect kid. But Janet has a secret ritual
and she'd like to keep it that way. After meals, she routinely excuses her-
self to the bathroom and shoves two fingers down her throat. A couple
of her friends have divined her eating disorder from the clues: She's
reed-thin and has a chronic cough. She's on the StairMaster at the Y for
an hour a day and two hours on weekends. She's constantly popping
breath mints. The stomach acid she brings up is dissolving the enamel
on her teeth, which are unnaturally white. The skin on her face seems
opalescent, and her eyes shine. She's dying.

Meet Matt and Sarah, already dubbed the perfect couple though
they've only known each other three months. Sarah is one of those peo-
ple who are always getting asked to be a bridesmaid. She's smart, funny,
spunky and kind. Mart's family adores her. His friends sometimes call
her up just to talk. When's the wedding?

As it turns out, never. Matt has just broken things off. He had to be
honest: She was just not cute enough. Whatever sexual spark might have
been there on day one — the novelty of a new scent, a new body to

74 Culture Jam

explore — is gone. He wishes it hadn't happened. He wishes she still
turned him on. But she doesn't.

Sarah is not unattractive, but she's not exactly Elle McPherson
either. Ten years of conditioning — slavering over his dad's old Playboys,
collecting Sports Illustrated swimsuit editions and trolling the porn sites
on the Internet — have taught him, at an almost cellular level, that Elle
McPherson and her ilk are what desirable women look like. Those little
parabolas where the hips flare from a twenty-five-inch waist. The
gravity-free breasts. When Matt and Sarah made love, he could only get
aroused if he imagined she was Elle, all hair and tan and Australian
accent. In time, his imagination failed him. He drew back. "Houston,"
he actually said to himself one night, watching her breathe in her sleep,
"we have a problem."

Meet Randy, bartender and gym rat. At around age nineteen,
Randy acquired a suit of armor. It is his own musculature. At work, in
a tight white Hugo Boss T-shirt, he looks merely fit. But when he's
pumped — which is about three hours out of every day — he swells to
almost comic-book proportions. The veins on his arms stand out like
rivers. His workout buddies call him "The Big Unit," after Astros closer
Randy Johnson. Size matters, but size has proved relative. He has found
that building the perfect body is a little like building the perfect stereo
system: When you improve one component, everything else becomes
underpowered by comparison and must therefore be upgraded. The
pecs, the delts, the glutes. Check the mirror for symmetry and shape.
Thus is born obsession. Occasional steroid use has shrunk Randy's
balls and scarred his face with acne.

Their lives and circumstances are very different, but Janet, Matt,
Sarah and Randy all have this in common: They're meat on the killing
floor of the body- image factory. The way they think about themselves as
physical beings has become grossly distorted. They've lost control of
their sexuality. They are no longer making the decisions about how they
should look, what they should feel, or what constitutes a successful rela-
tionship.

Then who is? There's no single, simple answer to that, but I think

Your Corporate Connection 75

it's fair to say a vast network of opinion-shapers is involved. It's not a
conspiracy, exactly. The controlling elite are simply people with power-
ful media access who are all pushing in the same direction. These people
work on Madison Avenue and Savile Row, in Hollywood and Paris and
Milan. One way or another, their checks are cut by the beauty industry,
which has persuaded us that if we are thin and toned and well tailored,
we will be loved. They have manipulated us badly.

And they have done it subtly, feeding our insecurities a little at a
time.

Fact: Nine out of ten North American women feel bad about some
aspect of their bodies, and men are not far behind. A 1992 survey of
eleven- to fifteen-year-old Canadian girls revealed that 50 percent
thought they should be thinner. They didn't wish they were thinner,
they thought they should be thinner, as if being thin were a kind of cul-
tural law. Now girls as young as five are watching what they eat. If you
randomly survey North American women, you'll find that around 50
percent of them are on a diet. If you ask adolescent girls and young
women, you'll find that figure around 60 percent. Healthy women are
sometimes led by women's magazines or unscrupulous cosmetic sur-
geons to believe they suffer from such "afflictions" as "violin deformity"
(a flaring of the hips, which is in fact many women's natural body
shape) or "batwing disorder" (loose skin under the arms, which is quite
normal) — and feel compelled to go under the knife to remedy them.
Some models have removed their bottom ribs to accentuate the thin-
ness of their waists.

But all this media-fed body consciousness is not just about being

thin.

Fact: Half of all exotic dancers were once beauty-pageant contes-
tants. That's a surprising statistic when you first hear it. It's hard to
bridge the distance between the wholesome, naive, small-town Caval-
cade Queen who plays "The Volga Boatman" on the accordion and
wants to be a vet, to the hardened stripper with seen-it-all eyes grind-
ing in red light on the stage of Number Five Orange. However, the
more you think about it, the more sense it makes. From the instant the

76 Culture Jam

twelve-year-old pageant contestant (and some pageant queens are
groomed much younger than this, as JonBenet Ramsey proved) steps
in front of a crowd, a kind of tractor beam takes hold of her. She feels
the electricity of what anthropologists sometimes call "the male gaze."
She understands that the sum of her worth, at that moment, to these
people, lies in the image she presents. The men study her lipstick, com-
plexion, hair, legs and budding breasts. She becomes acutely self-
conscious. She's either seduced by or a little terrified of the attention.
Or both. Appearance has never been more important and within her
latent sexuality (or at least her cultivated seductiveness) lies incredible
power — power that, ten years later, she may discover can be parlayed
into a pretty fair living on a peeler-bar stage. For maybe five or ten
years. For as powerful as the male gaze is, it's also fickle. When it shuts
down, the heat leaves the room pretty quickly.

This isn't a terribly original point to make. But I think the fact that
it's now almost a cliche — objectification distorts a person's sense of
worth — is a dangerous development. We think we understand the para-
digm, but I don't believe we do. I don't think many of us have really let
its seriousness, its implications sink in. We don't understand what's at
stake.

What does it mean that so many of us are willing to give up so
much of our power, voluntarily, systematically, to strangers? What does
it mean that we're willing to barter the most private parts of ourselves —
our way of thinking about ourselves, our way of being in the world — for
a brief buzz of attention?

I don't think we have a clear idea of what's going on. Maybe we
don't want to know. Perpetually children at some level, we give our-
selves up to the reassuringly strong hands of Calvin Klein and Estee
Lauder and Donna Karan. We follow their lead. We let them seduce us
and possess us, and from our relationship with them we derive a certain
sense of security, the way prostitutes derive a sense of security from
their pimps. This becomes the implicit contract: You work for me (i.e.,
you wear my clothes and makeup) and I will guard your place in the social
hierarchy. I will protect your turf. Without me, you know you would not

78 Culture Jam

feel safe going out. I ensure that you are not hurt out there, and for that you
owe me. For me you will try harder, you will look your best; no matter how
weak you feel, how broken, you will keep going out there each day because
you know that only I can give you the fix you need.

To a large extent, out there in the social world, we find that the
beauty industry has engineered our concept of what a good relationship
and good sex are all about. It has reinforced a rather odd way of keeping
our insecurities in check.

"You can always tell a couple who are on a first date," says a friend
who worked as a waitress in a dessert cafe in Vancouver. "She's not eat-
ing. He's got a big slab of cake but she's not eating. Just to be social she
might nibble a bite or two from his plate, with her own fork, but she
won't order her own dessert. It's not so much that she's worried about
looking like a pig if she eats. It's that eating anything makes her feel like
a pig. And when a girl starts feeling like a pig it's very easy to convince
herself that she is. She's a pig. No one — not this guy, not any guy — will
ever find her attractive ever again."

A day in your life.

8 A.M.: You are biting into a hash brown patty at McDonald's. The
grease shines on your chin like baby oil. You are reminded of your child-
hood.

What you don't know: One out of every four restaurant-prepared
breakfasts in the U.S. is eaten at McDonald's. Every three hours a new
McDonald's opens somewhere in the world. The company spends over
$1 billion every year on advertising.

9:30 A.M.: You are pushing a cart down the aisle of your neighbor-
hood supermarket, past little pyramids of shiny apples and peppers. You
buy Brussels sprouts as well as cocoa, sugar, coffee and bananas. You
marvel at a food system that can deliver asparagus in February. You toss
a nice ripe, red tomato into the basket.

What you don't know: These vegetables were pumped full of chem-
icals to enable them to grow in poor soil and survive the voyage to mar-
ket. The apples and peppers shine because of thick, petroleum-based

Your Corporate Connection 79

waxes. The nice ripe, red tomato, a "Flavr Savr," is genetically speaking
part flounder. (The technology for this process is owned by chemical
giant Monsanto.) A UCLA study of supermarket Brussels sprouts found
almost no trace of vitamins in them. "Cash crops" like cocoa, sugar, cof-
fee and bananas — generally grown to supply the First World — pull
more and more land away from traditional food crops and fail to pro-
tect the soil, often leading to famine. The food you eat comes from
wherever it can be grown most cheaply.

6:00 p.m.: The frozen dinner you're about to heat up in the
microwave looks virtually the same as the meal you had on the airplane
last night.

What you don't know: Boeing, which built that airplane you flew on
last night, had to widen its seats in the 1970s because its passengers had
grown too fat to fit them. Airline-style food is a good example of the
kind of food Americans favor: processed, convenient, leached of nutri-
ents but high in fat. The United States is the fattest nation on Earth and
getting fatter. Americans consume more calories per capita, more
snacks between meals and more sugar-rich sodas than anyone else. Fat
makes up almost 40 percent of all the calories we consume.

9:00 p.m. Evening snack of diet Coke (you're watching calories).

What you don't know: Flight attendants sometimes use diet Coke to
unclog sinks in commercial jets.

Eating is a complex act. It's loaded with moral, psychological,
social and sexual freight. To say food is simply fuel is like saying mar-
riage is simply a rent-sharing agreement. Food is sin. It's guilt. It's joy.
We overeat, then we undereat.

We want to listen to our bodies, but Frito-Lay has jammed our
feedback mechanisms. We want to eat a naturally healthy diet, but the
world's largest suppliers of processed foods have taught us to trust con-
venience, comfort and the taste of sugar, fat and salt. We've lost the
sacred joy of the feast.

In the movie Babette's Feast, a French housekeeper uses her lottery
winnings to prepare one amazing meal for the puritanical residents of a
Norwegian island. For them, the meal is excessively, almost porno-

80 Culture Jam

graphically, sensuous. They have become so accustomed to not deriving
pleasure from their meals that they cannot accept this gift from Babette.
Many of us raised on processed-food diets are like those islanders. Real,
flavorful, sensuous food is so foreign to us we don't know how to
respond to it anymore. We've lost our ability to appreciate it. We'd just
as soon eat something packaged.

Gone the evening meal, once a joyous ritual of family life. Gone the
prayerful acknowledgment of the harvest. Gone the connection between
the actual growing of food and its consumption.

Losing this connection is a little like losing a great old friend. The
old friend played many roles and enriched our life in many unexpected
ways. But over time she grew distant. We allowed outside parties —
processors, shippers, factory farmers, supermarketers, junk food mer-
chants — to come between us. By buying into an industrialized food
system, we have, as it were, traded in our great old friend for new
friends: food brands and corporate buddies.

These new friends are very attentive. McDonald's is never more
than about fifteen minutes away. A chocolate fix is as close as the near-
est 7-Eleven. The local supermarket now does much of the cooking for
us. Monsanto has taken on the job of planning our biotech future.

More and more, our relationship with the industrial food industry
begins to resemble the one it has with its chickens, pigs and cows. In
exchange for zero responsibility, we get zero control. Soon freedom is just
a vestigial memory. We cannot imagine ever having lived differently.

"It's the most bizarre thing," a journalist friend said one recent Monday.
Her nose and cheeks were flushed. She looked younger somehow. She
seemed scattered, blissed out. She'd clearly spent a scandalous weekend.
Was it love?

Yes, she admitted, it was.

"I'm in love with my car."

A week earlier she'd bought a new Jeep, and she'd spent the
last couple of days roaring around with the top down, getting a
sunburn.

Your Corporate Connection 81

The impression was that of a woman who suddenly discovers, after
twenty years of driving a VW van, that life is not about practicality — it's
about fun. She grinned for no reason, thinking of that car, remembering
the way it smelled and handled corners, remembering it was hers. She
was looking forward to bonding with new members of the four-by-four
tribe: swapping waxing tips and exchanging two-finger waves at stop-
lights. On special occasions, or as a reward for a good report card, she'd
let her daughter drive it to school. She was an "it" mom now and she
knew it. She felt it.

I understood. People have intense, sometimes obsessive relation-
ships with their cars. If you own one, think about how much time you
spend nurturing the bond. Think of all the hours you spend cleaning it,
changing its oil, hunting it down in parking lots, waiting for it at the
mechanic's and renewing its insurance. (Not to mention the hours you
spend alone together on the road.)

In the movie Swingers, any guy with an uncool car — or worse, no
car at all — is immediately "Shaqed" (rejected) by any woman he meets.
Cars are identifiers. They complete us, they renew us, they reinvent us.
Which explains why so many of us dutifully walk into a car showroom
every few years for a rejuvenating boost.

Cars are about time — about creating more of it. Instant mobility!
(Of course, when you stop to do the math you realize that's not quite
true. In most medium-size cities you can get to most places faster by
bicycle than by car.)

Cars are about speed — the illusion of pulling astronaut-caliber Gs,
even if you're just cornering a little too quickly on the way to the laun-
dromat.

They're about trust — that moment when Dad silently hands over
the keys, for the first time, to his eighteen-year-old son. (Have a good
time. Please don't wrap yourself around a telephone pole.)

I run around in a 1987 Toyota. The last time I changed the oil I
noticed that the bolt holding the oil pan on was stripped and oil was
leaking out. I went to my authorized Toyota dealer and had to cough up
$7 for that little bolt. The guy behind the counter openly admitted it

82 Culture Jam

was a rip-off. "But where else are you gonna go?" He laughed. That kind
of gouging, which over the years has become normal practice through-
out the auto industry, long ago soured my relationship with the
automakers.

I don't like the planned obsolescence, which has also become nor-
mal practice. Cars aren't like computers: They don't become grossly
underequipped for the job every few years. Yet the models change dra-
matically year after year. Around year two or three, little things start to
break down or wear out, and somehow we become convinced that
trading in the old bomb for a brand-new model is the smart thing
to do.

I don't like the way cars, over the last half century, have eroded our
sense of village and the vitality of our neighborhoods. "Once trucks can
move produce into your area 24 hours a day, local produce markets dis-
appear," notes Jane Holtz Kay in Asphalt Nation. "Once ambulances can
get to your place on the freeway, doctors stop making housecalls. The
arteries may be alive, but the beating heart of community is hard to
find."

I don't like the way the global automakers, with their billion-dollar
marketing budgets and their unchallenged fifty-year run on television,
have kept the personal automobile — arguably the most destructive
product we humans have ever produced — at the center of our trans-
portation agendas for so long.

I don't like the fact that the price of cars does not tell the ecological
truth and that the environmental costs of driving are blithely passed on
to future generations to the tune of hundreds of billions of dollars every
year.

Most of all I don't like the way the global automakers and oil com-
panies minimize and sidestep these issues — how, instead of facing the
problems of global warming and climate change head on, they deliber-
ately obfuscate with lyrical advertising campaigns that promote the pre-
posterous idea that their industry is eco-friendly.

I hate all these things and yet I still drive my Toyota. The love of
convenience, the time I save, the speed and the power, and the lack of

Your Corporate Connection 83

viable alternatives trump my hate more often than not. And so my rela-
tionship with my Toyota and the auto industry is full of guilt and angst
and barely repressed anger. It's the same kind of slow burn that busts up
marriages, twenty-five years down the road, with a violently cathartic
act involving an ax or an attorney.

THE GLOBAL ECONOMIC PYRAMID SCHEME

Seven men with genial smiles stand shoulder to shoulder on a broad
lawn inside a matrix of cordoned-off boulevards. A hundred photogra-
phers snap their picture. The seven call each other by their first names,
but just about everyone else calls them "Mister." The police are on high
alert. The G-7 economic summit is one of the very few occasions where
the leaders of the most affluent nations are together in one place. If
aliens were planning an effective tactical strike on Earth, here and now
would be the best time and place.

These seven men, here to coordinate their economic, financial
and trade policies, stand at the helm of the global economy. Between
them they control more than two thirds of the world's wealth. They
carry the clout within the World Bank and the International Monetary
Fund. They wield the power at the World Trade Organization. When
their finance ministers say "Go" by lowering taxes and interest rates,
people around the world open their wallets. When they say "Stop" by
pulling the macroeconomic levers the other way, people grow ner-
vous. They cut back. Jobs are lost. Lives are put on hold.

Of course, the global economy is like the gorilla that sits where it

86 Culture Jam

wants; the G-7 leaders don't have a firm rein on it. However, through
their power to direct global economic policies, and through reassuring
spectacles like the G-7 summit, the leaders create the perception of mas-
tery. And in politics, perception is everything. The leaders maintain
their authority because we believe.

At every summit the focal point of discussion is how to maintain
economic growth. Growth is the sine qua non of consumer capitalism.
Without growth the global economy as it is currently structured makes
no sense. There seem to be no alternatives. But there is an alternative —
one that has never been discussed at any summit.

Two Schools of Thought

The view that in good times or bad, growth will set us free is a classic argu-
ment coming from economics' so-called expansionist camp. Expansion-
ism remains the dominant economic paradigm because expansionists
(sometimes called neoclassical economists) are the dominant economic
policymakers of our time. They are the professors at our universities, the
policy advisers to our governments, the brains in most of the think tanks.
Their confident logic shapes the economic strategies by which we live.

The competing view of global economic reality — the ecological
worldview — is the new kid on the block. Its vision is not quite fully
formed, its logic is a little less confident. Its proponents probably make
up fewer than one in fifty of all the practicing economists and econom-
ics professors in the world today. Though rapidly growing in accep-
tance, ecological economics has so far been little more than a minor
irritant to its dominant expansionist rival.

The two worldviews are chalk and cheese. Or, if you like, heaven
and hell.

Ecological economists (also known as bioeconomists) foresee an
apocalypse. They warn that we have reached a unique juncture in
human history — that, ecologically speaking, the world is already "full"
and further expansion will lead us into an ecological nightmare, a pro-
longed and possibly permanent "age of despair."

The Global Economic Pyramid Scheme 87

The expansionists, by contrast, see growth not as a problem but as
the solution to our economic woes. There is no reason why growth can-
not continue indefinitely, they claim. "There are no . . . limits to the car-
rying capacity of the Earth that are likely to bind at any time in the
foreseeable future," pronounced Lawrence Summers, former chief
economist of the World Bank. "There isn't a risk of an apocalypse due to
global warming or anything else. The idea that the world is headed over
an abyss is profoundly wrong. The idea that we should put limits on
growth because of some natural limit is a profound error."

This almost unbelievably arrogant view is shared by other expan-
sionists who put their faith in technology. "If it is easy to substitute
other factors for natural resources," says Nobel laureate Robert Solow,
"then . . . the world can, in effect, get along without natural resources, so
exhaustion is just an event, not a catastrophe." The late Julian Simon,
author of Scarcity or Abundance? A Debate on the Environment, once
boasted: "We have in our hands — in our libraries really — the technol-
ogy to feed, clothe, and supply energy to an ever-growing population
for the next seven billion years."

Within the ecological camp, of course, these are fighting words.
Worse, they're grievously irresponsible and just plain false. William
Rees, coauthor of Our Ecological Footprint and a leading spokesman of
the new economics, warns that the fivefold expansion in world eco-
nomic activity since World War II (and a twentyfold increase this cen-
tury) "has produced an unprecedented level of material and energy
exchange between the ecosphere and the human economic subsystem."
He points out that 40 percent of terrestrial and 25 percent of marine
photosynthesis have now been diverted to human use. He sees ozone
depletion, climate change, deforestation, soil degradation and the loss
of biodiversity as unambiguous warning signals telling us to stop
stressing our ecosphere or die. In 1994, fifty-eight World Academy of
Science directors released a document declaring, essentially, that
humankind is proceeding down an unprecedented and catastrophic
path which will destroy the support systems upon which life depends.
Overpopulation, overconsumption, inappropriate technological appli-

88 Culture Jam

cations and economic expansion are changing the biophysical features
of the Earth.

Ecological economists accuse expansionists of pawning the family
silverware — of "liquidating" the planet's irreplaceable natural capital
for short-term gain. Robert Ayres, in the Journal of the International
Society for Ecological Economics, writes: "... there is every indication
that human economic activity, supported by perverse trade and
growth' policies, is well on the way to perturbing our natural environ-
ment more, and faster, than any known event in planetary history, save
perhaps the large asteroid collision that may have killed off the
dinosaurs. We humans may well be on the way to our own extinction."

Ecological Economics

Assume for a moment that our survival is indeed threatened. What do
we do? How can we address that threat? An obvious answer is to pursue
sustainability. To design a new economic system that gives us what we
need without sacrificing the well-being of future generations. For eco-
logical economists (or bioeconomists), leveling the playing field be-
tween generations is the big challenge of our time. Nothing else comes
close. And the solution is nothing short of a cultural revolution — an
about-face in our values, lifestyles and institutional agendas. A reinven-
tion of the American dream.

Expansionists see the pursuit of sustainability as a much simpler
proposition: Create as much wealth as possible by freeing up markets,
privatizing government services and eliminating barriers to trade. This
will, according to their theories, produce a new round of economic
expansion that will create the wealth we need to tackle environmental
degradation, poverty and other economic woes.

But there's a flaw in the expansionists' argument. They have no
accurate way of measuring the economic progress they keep talking
about. Their only measure of growth is the Gross Domestic Product
(GDP), and it is seriously flawed.

Consider: When the Exxon Valdez spilled its load of oil onto the

The Global Economic Pyramid Scheme 89

Alaskan coast, $2 billion was spent trying to clean up and minimize the
ecological damage. That money then circulated throughout the Ameri-
can economy, resulting in a significant increase in the GDP. When the
Gulf War broke out, America's GDP rose again. Money changed hands.
The country became "healthier." Indeed, every time there's a car acci-
dent or a newly diagnosed cancer patient, whenever personal or societal
catastrophes occur, the GDP goes up and the economy "gains."

Consider: Walking, biking and using mass transit contribute less to
the GDP than using a car. Trains contribute less than airplanes; an extra
blanket or sweater contributes less than raising the thermostat; one-
child families contribute less than six-child families; eating potatoes
contributes less than eating beef; starting a vegetable garden contributes
less than buying produce at the supermarket; staying home to raise your
daughter contributes less than getting a part-time job at Wendy's.
Indeed, the GDP fails to assign any value at all to unpaid or volunteer
work. Work done by tens of millions of North Americans simply does
not show up on the expansionists' radar. Similarly, the GDP fails to
assign any value to declining fish stocks or disappearing forests. It's as if
these negatives simply don't exist.

The GDP measures "goods" but not "bads." It cannot distinguish
economic benefit for social gain from economic benefit for social loss.
Conducting economic policy based solely on the GDP, says Canadian
political scientist Ronald Coleman, is like driving your car without a gas
gauge. The engine seems to be running fine, but for how long? There's
no way to know.

That's why ecological economists have spurned the GDP and
developed their own measures of economic progress. The three graphs
on page 91 show the GDPs of the U.S., U.K. and Germany all soaring
merrily upward from 1955 through the 1980s. However, a more accu-
rate measure of economic progress, the ISEW (Index of Sustainable
Economic Welfare), developed by Herman Daly and John Cobb in
1990, tells another story. When some of the "bads," such as pollution,
depletion of nonrenewable resources and car exhaust-related health
costs, are factored in, a very different picture of the economy emerges.

90 Culture Jam

The U.S., German and U.K. economies all show no improvement in
economic welfare since the 1970s. In fact, economic welfare levels off
and starts falling quite dramatically in each country.

The ISEW (as well as the GPI, or Genuine Progress Indicator, pio-
neered by the San Francisco think tank Redefining Progress) exposes
the expansionists as a bunch of eager beavers without a well-considered
business plan, pseudoscientists urging the world to follow their lead
before they themselves have clear bearings. Neoclassical economists
cling to their mathematical models like children to their teddy bears.
They operate in a kind of academic isolation that does not acknowledge
the effects of their policies on the real world. Their world is the world of
"revealed preferences" and "rational expectations," of "perfectly volun-
tary exchange" and "negative externalities" that can be dismissed. Their
world is not our world. Their world does not exist.

"The difference between science and economics," says Ferdinand
Banks in Truth and Economics, "is that science aims at an understanding
of the behavior of nature, while economics is involved with an under-
standing of models — and many of these models have no relation to any
state of nature that has ever existed on this planet, or any that is likely to
exist between now and doomsday. The word that comes to mind when
confronted by these fantasies is fraud."

The Doomsday Machine

In 1996, news stories of a bizarre and tragic wholesale fraud began fil-
tering out of Eastern Europe. In Bulgaria, Romania, Russia, Serbia and
Albania, citizens who had sunk their savings into investment schemes
that promised money for nothing got a glimpse of the dark side of the
free market. In Albania close to 90 percent of the dirt-poor population
had put some or all of its money in "foundations," which were actually
simple pyramid schemes. No one knew what they were investing in,
exactly, but the pitches were electrifying, the promised returns too
enticing to resist: cars, tropical vacations, triple your money in three
months, a new and better life for everyone. The people believed. And

Source: Herman E. Daly and John B. Cobb, Jr..
For The Common Good. Beacon Press. 1990.

lhd "TD m IB "BO l*» IfW IHfl 'W im JMS

Source: N*w Economics Foundation, Tim Jackson
and Nic Marks.

Sowce: Frier, da of die Eanh. U.K.

Two different ways of measuring
economic progress: Gross Domestic
Product (GDP) and the Index of Sustain-
able Economic Welfare (ISEW). When
pollution, depletion of nonrenewable
resources, car exhaust-related health
costs and other social and ecological
costs are subtracted from the GDP, then
economic "progress™ levels off around
1975 and starts falling thereafter.

92 Culture Jam

why not? "Albanian money is the cleanest in the world," reassured Pres-
ident Sali Berisha. If the government endorsed these schemes, surely
they were legitimate. Many Albanians took the plunge. They bet the
family fruit stands, sold their homes and their livestock. In Albania, as
elsewhere in post-Communist Europe, new investors eventually dried
up and the funds began failing. Finally, the house of cards came down.
People rioted. They had nothing left. Albanians collectively lost a billion
dollars — three times the national budget deficit. They had trusted their
government and they had been betrayed.

The response in the West was predictable. Bemused pity might best
sum it up. We shook our heads at those poor benighted bastards who
had been persuaded to "bet on miracles."

But how different is our economic fable? Don't we trust our finan-
cial advisers, our expansionist economists, our political leaders as
blindly as Albanians trusted theirs? Most of us have no idea where our
money is. It's not in the bank where we left it. The bank injected it into
the bloodstream of the global money market. Vast sums move through
this market every day and collect at certain hot spots. After a Canadian
company announced it had found the world's biggest gold deposit in
the Indonesian rain forest, everyone wanted in. The penny stock soared
to nearly $300 a share — until allegations of fraud surfaced and the
house of cards came tumbling down, and with it billions of investor
dollars, including hundreds of millions invested through pension
funds. We sink billions into mutual funds and retirement plans, assum-
ing these to be secure, broad-based, blue-chip investments. But what's
in these funds? Just as with hot dogs, you don't really want to know.
Some of your money may be bolstering the economies of dubious,
often atrocious, even genocidal regimes.

About half a million people around the world wake up every day,
leave the world of people, work and nature, and play money games in
cyberspace. They invent new instruments (futures, bonds, derivatives,
arbitrage, etc.), each with its own risks and rewards, creating $50 in play
money for every $1 worth of real products and services actually circu-
lating in the world. They further inflate the amount of "money" in the

The Global Economic Pyramid Scheme 93

system by borrowing from each other and bidding up prices. Trillions of
dollars slosh around this system every day making billions of dollars of
virtual profits for the nimble and the quick. Even as these people sleep,
their computers continue searching for margins of profit, automatically
triggering buys and sell-offs when the conditions are right.

At the U.S. investment house Kidder Peabody, a single trader
reports $1.7 trillion in phony trades over two years before he is caught.
At Barings Bank in Britain a young broker, praised for having an
"almost unique capacity" to produce big profits without taking signifi-
cant risks, loses $1.3 billion in one month. He bankrupts the 233-year-
old bank with his enthusiasm for Japanese futures.

Those famed, highly speculative "derivatives" aren't just the special
currency of young sharks. The accounting firm of Ernst and Young
revealed in 1997 that nearly a third of the investment funds it had been
tracking included derivatives. Overall, 97 percent of the world's mone-
tary transactions are now speculative. In 1970, the figure hovered
around 30 percent.

Blind trust is a scary thing. We give up control of our money. We
assume the markets will hold and our nest eggs will grow, when in truth
our investment portfolio is often held together with baling wire and
blind faith.

And what about the global economy? Is it viable? Is there enough
real "estate," real factories, real jobs, real gold mines? Is there enough
good topsoil? Are there enough fish left in the sea? Is there enough real
economic progress to keep the whole thing growing? And if so, for how
long?

On October 27, 1987 — Black Monday — the Dow Jones Industrial
Average fell 554 points, the biggest single-day plunge in ten years. Cir-
cuit breakers on the NYSE kicked in and shut down trading. Just days
earlier, Hong Kong's Hang Seng Index had suffered a similar crash, join-
ing a half dozen Asian economies that had fallen or would soon fall in a
domino effect of pessimism. Americans — a plucky lot — rebounded
quickly. Analysts here called the dive a "correction." Investors jumped
back in and the Dow was soon soaring toward 10,000 again, as if noth-

94 Culture Jam

ing had happened. But something had happened. The synchronized
crashes showed the awesome degree to which world markets are now
codependent; how the global economy is now one entity. Everything we
do has global implications. Crisis is never far away. The Japanese, Chi-
nese and Asian "tiger" economies have proven much more precarious
than we thought. Our own economy depends, to a great extent, on
managed public moods and panic held at bay by carefully scripted reas-
surances from the G-7 leaders and Alan Greenspan at the U.S. Federal
Reserve. What would happen if, on top of our current insecurities, the
fear of escalating climate change (planetary ecology and economy
caught in a deadly downward spiral) suddenly became real to us? Here's
a good guess: a crash to dwarf Black Friday and Black Monday. You've
got to wonder how long we can continue playing the neoclassical
expansionist game, living off our natural capital and calling it income,
before the pyramid collapses and the G-7 leaders head for the hills.

The Albanians may have been naive, but their actions were under-
standable. They had to do something with their money because it was
rapidly losing its worth. The Japanese, Koreans, Malaysians, Indone-
sians, and to some degree the rest of us are now caught in a similar vise.
We're worried about the future. We don't want to suffer in our old age.
We want a secure sum to retire on. We're nervous and impatient. We
want our money to grow quickly. So we try stocks, bonds and futures,
and hope our nest egg is growing. "Invest my money wisely," we tell our
brokers and we place our future in their hands.

Pyramid schemes depend on a continuous supply of dupes (early
contributors being paid from the pockets of later ones). When no new
contributors can be found, these schemes fail. In the expansionist
model of the global economy, future generations — our children and
our children's children — are the dupes. As supplies of clean water and
air grow scarce, as forests, cod, salmon and wildlife vanish, as climatic
instability escalates, we will eventually reach a point where one genera-
tion suddenly balks, unable to buy into the scheme. How close we are to
that moment of truth is anybody's guess.

Recently I saw a TV news item about a town in Nebraska where the

The Global Economic Pyramid Scheme 95

accumulating smoke from wood-burning stoves was making the resi-
dents sick. Asthma sufferers had to be hospitalized. Children couldn't
play outside after school. A local bylaw was finally enacted to restrict
wood burning to Monday, Wednesday and Friday afternoons. Many
townspeople were outraged. How dare someone tell me what to do in
my own home! they howled. What's next? You're going to tell me I can't
drive my car? Can't own a gun? Can't have a second child, like in China?

I'm well acquainted with this type of response. Every year the
Media Foundation tries to purchase airtime for its "Buy Nothing Day"
TV campaign, which asks Americans to put away their wallets on the
last Friday of November. Every year every major network turns our ad
down, but one program — CNN Headline News — takes our money and
runs our spot. Every year after the ad airs, dozens of irate viewers jam
our 1-800 line. "Get out of this country, you pinko tree-huggers," one
concerned citizen explained last year. "Go back to where you came
from."

For an enormous number of people, the idea that they should set
limits on themselves is unthinkable: "Why should I cut back? This is my
paycheck, this is my life." Any restriction on this unfettered freedom to
consume just does not square with the American dream. Our current
economic system cannot tolerate any reduction in consumption. We
simply cannot deal with that idea. That is our rigidity. And that is the
kind of rigidity that brings civilizations down.

Meanwhile, back at the G-7 summit, the world leaders are putting
on a good show for the thousands of journalists, reporters and TV
crews. There are daily news releases, communiques, background papers,
joint declarations and photo ops. The PR people do their thing. A
protest erupts as a few thousand people link hands and try to circle one
of the leaders' meetings, but on TV this demonstration comes off as
merely another part of the spectacle, somehow lending even more cred-
ibility to the event and reinforcing its importance and legitimacy.

The U.S. president reads some words prepared for him by his pol-
icy advisers. Millions around the world watch the proceedings on the
evening news. We feel mildly reassured. These guys must know what

96 Culture Jam

they're doing. Despite the recent worrisome rumblings, the global eco-
nomic vessel is on course. The unsinkable ship of dreams proceeds into
the night. Inured, we grab the remote, switch away from the news and
settle on The X-Files, where agent Fox Mulder is once again sniffing out
some wild conspiracy.

spring

THE REVOLUTIONARY IMPULSE

Most people in the world have never heard of culture jamming. Yet it is
not a new movement. We place ourselves on a revolutionary continuum
that includes, moving backward in time, early punk rockers, the '60s
hippie movement, a group of European intellectuals and conceptual
artists called the Situationist International (born of the Lettrist Interna-
tional), the surrealists, Dadaists, anarchists, and a host of other social
agitators down through the ages whose chief aim was to challenge the
prevailing ethos in a way that was so primal and heartfelt it could only
be true.

What we all have in common — besides a belligerent attitude
toward authority — is a willingness to take big risks, and a commitment
to pursue small, spontaneous moments of truth. Opportunities to act
boldly (which often means not the way you would normally, reflexively
act) present themselves every day and maybe even every hour. Authen-
tic acts tend to get noticed amid the fakery and correctness on which
postmodern culture thrives. "In a small room where people unani-
mously maintain a conspiracy of silence," said Nobel laureate Czeslaw
Milosz, "one word of truth sounds like a pistol shot."

100 Culture Jam

In his book Lipstick Traces, American cultural critic Greil Marcus
fixes The Sex Pistols' Johnny Rotten squarely in the tradition of the
rebel seer. Rotten was a gleeful anarchist who used the word "fuck" on
television and sang like he meant to change the world — or at least
explode the dreamy, Beatles-fueled optimism of the day, and stick a fork
into classic rock. He somehow rose above the obvious joke of The Pis-
tols — the naked commercialism and hype of a band without much tal-
ent — and created something vital.

It's not clear whether Rotten knew anything about the Situationist
International. But The Sex Pistols and the SI were most definitely on the
same page, philosophically. Their song "Anarchy in the U.K." espoused,
in crudely poetic form, the philosophy of the movement. The Pistols
wanted to live "not as an object but as a subject of the story," as Marcus
puts it. That's about as good a working definition of the culture jam-
mers' ethos as you'll ever find.

Marcus recalls watching Johnny Rotten shouting madly over the
band's guitars in front of the Berlin Wall and understanding that "his
aim . . . was to take in all the rage, intelligence and strength in his being
and then fling them back at the world; to make the world notice; to
make the world doubt its most cherished and unexamined beliefs." I
think culture jammers can learn a lot from the original punks. They
were one of the first to feel the nihilism and to rail against a world that
offered no future — and for a few years their rage shook the world.

The punks, like the hippies, yippies, beats, anarchists, Dadaists,
surrealists, automatistes, fluxists and any number of other disaffected
visionaries, represented an age-old spirit of spontaneous defiance
toward the established order. But it was the Situationists who first
applied that spirit of anarchy to modern media culture. They were the
first to understand how the media spectacle slowly corrodes the human
psyche. They were, in a sense, the first postmodern revolutionaries.

The Situationists were originally just eight artists and writers, most
of them European, who sat down one July day in 1957 in the little town
of Cosio d'Arroscia, Italy, to have a little fun together over Gauloises
and absinthe. Though a reasonably short-lived group (by the '70s, most

The Revolutionary Impulse 101

everyone had forgotten about them), they generated an anarchic drive
that a generation of students, artists and radicals recognized as the real
thing.

The Situationists declared a commitment to "a life of permanent
novelty." They were interested only in freedom, and just about any
means to it were justified. The creativity of everyday people, which con-
sumer capitalism and communism had weakened but not killed, des-
perately needed to find expression. Down with the bureaucracies and
hierarchies and ideologies that stifled spontaneity and free will. To the
Situationists, you are — everyone is — a creator of situations, a perfor-
mance artist, and the performance, of course, is your life, lived in your
own way. Various stunts were concocted to foster spontaneous living.
Situationist members suggested knocking down churches to make space
for children to play, and putting switches on the street lamps so lighting
would be under public control.

The Situationists believed that many times a day, each of us comes
to a little fork in the path. We can then do one of two things: act the way
we normally, reflexively act, or do something a little risky and wild, but
genuine. We can choose to live our life as "a moral, poetic, erotic, and
almost spiritual refusal" to cooperate with the demands of consumer
culture.

The Situationists spoke often of the "spectacle" of modern life. The
term encompassed everything from billboards to art exhibitions to soc-
cer matches to radio and TV. Broadly speaking, it meant modern soci-
ety's "spectacular" level of commodity consumption and hype. Everything
human beings once experienced directly had been turned into a show
put on by someone else. Real living had been replaced by prepackaged
experiences and media-created events. Immediacy was gone. Now there
was only "mediacy" — life as mediated through other instruments, life as
a media creation. The Situationists used the term "kidnapped": The
spectacle had "kidnapped" our real lives, co-opting whatever authentic-
ity we once had.

I think this helps explain the strong visceral reaction so many peo-
ple had to Nike's use of the Beatles tune "Revolution," and, later, to

102 Culture Jam

Apple's appropriation of Bob Dylan and The Gap's (posthumous) mug-
ging of Jack Kerouac. Nostalgic, griping yuppies may not have been able
to articulate it perfectly, but they understood that some fundamental
part of their lives had been stolen.

In the Richard Linklater film Before Sunrise, the young hero, played
by Ethan Hawke, has an existential crisis: He suddenly grows sick to
death of his own company. Every party he goes to, there he is. Every bus
he rides, every class he attends, he runs into . . . himself. For him, even
his own identity had somehow become a spectacle. Here Linklater is
staring into the Situationist abyss, and finding it a little terrifying. To
paraphrase Situationist leader Guy Debord: Where the self is by proxy, it
is not. This may also explain why one of the juiciest consumer target
groups is the man or woman known as the "emulator." Emulators look
for products that make them feel like somebody else — someone more
important. Since no product can help you fully escape your old identity,
frustration mounts, a credit card is produced and the cycle of alienation
deepens. (Situationists might point to emulators as proof of a devolu-
tion in the state of living: from "being" to "having," and then from "hav-
ing" to "appearing to have.")

Debord remains a largely unheralded visionary. Derided in his
later years, nearly canonized in France immediately following his sui-
cide in 1967 and then gradually forgotten, Debord is only now enjoying
a little posthumous fame — especially in France, where a group calling
themselves the "Perpendiculaires" have positioned themselves as spiri-
tual progeny of the Situationists. They maintain that culture ought to be
spread laterally (through salon-type discussions) rather than vertically
(through TV and the Internet).

In some ways, Debord was even more of a pioneer of the mental
environment than his high-profile coeval, Marshall McLuhan. Where
McLuhan only described the mass-culture trance, Debord developed
some effective ways to break out of it. One way was the derive. Literally
"the drift," the derive was an idea borrowed from the Dadaists. The Sit-
uationists defined it as "locomotion without a goal." As a deriviste, you
float through the city, open to whatever you come in contact with, thus

The Revolutionary Impulse 103

exposing yourself to the whole spectrum of feelings you encounter by
chance in everyday life. Openness is key. You embrace whatever you
love, and in the process, you discover what it is you hate.

The Situationists believed the derive could largely replace the old
twin occupations of work and entertainment, and become a model for
the "playful creation" of a new way of life. The deriviste is a drifter in the
best possible sense, not someone down and out but up and beyond, liv-
ing outside the stifling roles society prescribes for us. Living well,
Debord said, involves the "systematic questioning of all the diversions
and works of a society, a total critique of its idea of happiness."

Another of the Situationists' favorite tropes was detournement,
which Debord proposed as a way for people to take back the spectacle
that had kidnapped their lives. Literally a "turning around," detourne-
ment involved rerouting spectacular images, environments, ambiences
and events to reverse or subvert their meaning, thus reclaiming them.
With its limitless supply of ideas, ranging from rewriting the speech bal-
loons of comic-strip characters, to altering the width of streets and the
heights of buildings and the colors and shapes of doors and windows, to
radically reinterpreting world events such as the 1965 Watts riots in Los
Angeles, the Internationale Situationniste — the journal the Situationists
published between 1958 and 1969 — was a sometimes profound, some-
times absurd laboratory of provocation and detournement. Once,
Debord altered a famous drawing of Lenin by placing a barebreasted
woman on his forehead with the caption "The Universe Turns on the
Tips of Breasts." Debord had his book Memoires bound in heavy sand-
paper so that when it was placed on the shelves of libraries, it would
destroy other books. One famous detournement happened in the Notre
Dame cathedral on Easter Sunday in 1950. With thousands of people
watching, a Lettrist provocateur dressed as a Dominican monk slipped
onto the altar and delivered a sermon accusing the Catholic Church of
"the deadly diversion of the force of life in favor of an empty heaven,"
and then solemnly proclaimed that "God is dead." It was with this spirit
of detournement that the Situationists invaded enemy territory and
tried to "devalue the currency of the spectacle." And it was with this

104 Culture Jam

defiance that they intended to pull off a cultural revolution, "a gigantic
turning around of the existing social world."

The Situationists had some fairly radical notions that, when you
consider them deeply, make sense. They believed that vacations, so
cherished by the masses as a kind of sanity-saver, instead just enforce
"the loop of alienation and domination" and symbolize "the false
promises of modern life." (If you're living a full life, why would you
want to "get away" from it?) A memorable neo-Situationist slogan
reads: "Club Med, a Cheap Holiday in Other People's Misery."

In The Revolution of Everyday Life, which apart from Debord's The
Society of Spectacle is the seminal book to emerge from the Situationist
movement, Raul Vaneigem argued that everyday life is ultimately the
measure of all things, and the ground on which all revolutions must
unfold. But, he argued, an unfortunate, alienating self-consciousness
has crept into our lives. "Even the tiniest of gestures — opening a door,
holding a teacup, a facial expression — and the most private and individ-
ual actions — coming home, making tea, arguing with a lover — have
always already been represented and shown to us within the spectacle."
Thus, our most intimate gestures have become stereotypes, and our
lives cliched. But Vaneigem passionately believed that the spectacle was
fast approaching a saturation point, a crisis out of which "a new poetry
of real experience and a reinvention of life are bound to spring."

Today, the stultifying passivity and alienation of the spectacle in
our lives has increased to proportions Vaneigem and Debord could
hardly have imagined. The great, insidious power of the spectacle lies in
the fact that it is actually a form of mental slavery that we are free to
resist, only it never occurs to us to do so. Our media-saturated postmod-
ern world, where all communication flows in one direction, from the
powerful to the powerless, produces a population of lumpen spectators
"modern men and women, the citizens of the most advanced societies
on earth, thrilled to watch whatever it is they're given to watch."

Greil Marcus calls this the "democracy of false desire." The specta-
cle is an instrument of social control, offering the illusion of unlimited
choice, but in fact reducing the field of play to a choice of preselected

The Revolutionary Impulse 105

experiences: adventure movies, nature shows, celebrity romances, polit-
ical scandals, ball games, net surfing

Boredom emerges in the Situationist literature as one of the Big
Enemies. The Situationists saw a world crushed by wasted potential.
Mass mechanization, for example, was supposed to create vast stretches
of leisure time in which people could create free-flowing, imaginative
lives for themselves. Instead, people were allowing their leisure hours to
be gobbled up by programmed entertainments. Increasingly, they
weren't in control of their own fun anymore. The Situationist solution:
Take back the show. Create your own atmospheres, ambiences and situa-
tions. Build something "provisional and lived." One might, to cite one
example, take the predictable city and redesign it as a bunch of emotive
neighborhoods — the "bizarre" quarter, the "sinister" quarter, the
"tragic" quarter, the "happy" quarter, and the "useful" quarter — that
people can drift in and out of.

Whatever else you might think of Guy Debord — that he was wildly
idealistic and extreme in his views — he did walk the walk. He created a
life free of spectacle (except right at the end when, sick and in pain, he
carefully orchestrated his own spectacular suicide by a gunshot through
the heart). He never had a job; he spent his time in taverns, arguing phi-
losophy, drinking and writing. He consistently refused interviews with
the press and wrote only six slim volumes. "I wrote much less than most
people who write, but drank much more than most people who drink,"
he once remarked. For him life really was an eternal festival. He believed
passionately in his own destiny and that of his friends. "Our kind will be
the first to blaze a trail into a new life," he boasted.

The heroes of the Situationists' era were unbridled and anarchical,
pure vessels of poetic expression, living somehow out of time. They
were the polar opposite of the people often held up as examples in our
own age of workaholism — competitive, ambitious folks who, as Welsh
historian L.T.C. Rolt put it in his classic book High Horse Riderless,
"believe in faster trains and more traffic, who ravage the landscape
while claiming to protect it, who disintegrate the family while assuring
us it is their priority, who sanctify work while increasing unemploy-

106 Culture Jam

ment. All this because they have jettisoned faith in the true spiritual
nature of the human being and have not the courage to risk being real,
but must always be striving to become superior to their competitors."

The cognitive psychologist Abraham Maslow spoke of the impor-
tance of peak experiences in the life of a fully functioning, or "self-
actualized," human being. These experiences are so engrossing to the
senses — in this instant, this act — that people actually feel they are living
out of time. Other disciplines have other names for it. Zen Buddhists
call peak experiences satori. "Generations of poets, prophets, and revo-
lutionaries, not to mention lovers, drug-takers, and all those who have
somehow found the time to stand and stare" have craved this ecstatic
feeling of oneness with the world. This is also why many culture jam-
mers take daily leaps of faith, or of courage — acts that take them out-
side market-structured consciousness long enough to get a taste of real
living. Living in the moment, pursuing the authentic gesture, living
close to the edge — call it what you will — when it's genuine, it's the force
that makes life worth living. It is also what consumer capitalism takes
away from you every time it sells you brand-name "cool" or this
month's rebel attitude.

When I was shooting a film in Japan called Satori in the Right Cor-
tex, I asked the head monk of a Zen monastery in Kamakura if I could
take footage of his disciples meditating. Yes, he said, but first you must
meditate. He wasn't talking about a quick namaste and a couple of
mumbled koans. He meant sitting for two full days. So I took him up on
his challenge. I sat on the floor meditating until my back stiffened,
joints ached and muscles cramped. It was physical and psychological
torture — a hell I will never forget. But by the end of the second day
something really had changed. The monk had forced a painful interrup-
tion in my soft routine, and I emerged humbled, thankful and, for a few
hours, euphoric. Maybe only when you're shoved into a new pattern of
behavior and make the commitment not to back out — when your hand
is held to the fire or you hold your own hand to the fire — do the real
gains come. When the trance is interrupted, you catch a brief, tantaliz-
ing glimpse of the way life could be.

The Revolutionary Impulse 107

What does this have to do with revolution and culture jamming?
Everything. Interrupting the stupefyingly comfortable patterns we've
fallen into isn't pleasant or easy. It's like crawling out of your warm bed
in your dark room one December morning at five A.M. and plunging
into a tub of ice water. It shocks the system. But sometimes shock is
what a system needs. It's certainly what our bloated, self-absorbed con-
sumer culture needs.

Culture jamming is, at root, just a metaphor for stopping the flow
of spectacle long enough to adjust your set. Stopping the flow relies on
an element of surprise. That's why a Zen master may suddenly throw
you a wildly cryptic, inappropriate, even obscene answer to your harm-
less query. He might answer your question by removing his shoe and
placing it on top of his head, or throwing it at you, or telling you that if
you meet Buddha on the road you must kill him. The Zen master is try-
ing to break your trance. He's showing you a new path to the waterfall.
Debord called this kind of thing "breaking the old syntax," and replac-
ing it with a new one. The new syntax carries the instructions for "a
whole new way of being in the world."

What does the perceptual shift feel like when it comes? Imagine a
desperately down-and-out soul who suddenly finds God. Now try to
imagine the opposite of that process. This moment of reckoning is not
so much like suddenly seeing heaven in a world you thought was hell as
it is suddenly seeing hell in a world you thought was heaven. That world
is the world of summer blockbusters and $5 lattes and Super Bowls in
which a thirty-second ad slot sells for $1.5 million — the spectacular
world of the American dream, a world you were raised to believe was
the best of all worlds, but a world that collapses under scrutiny. If you
stare at your reflection in the mirror long enough, your face becomes a
monster's face, with enormous sunken gargoyle eyes.

In the 1998 film The Truman Show, a corporation adopts Truman
Burbank at birth, then carefully scripts a whirl of product placement
and impression management into his life, which is televised live,
twenty-four hours a day. The only time Truman upsets that managed
order, when he catches a glimpse of the real world behind his scripted

108 Culture Jam

life, is when he does something spontaneous. Slowly, he comes to realize
that only a chain of spontaneous acts will lead to salvation. The culture
jammer is seized by a similar sense of urgency to do something, any-
thing, to escape the consumerist script.

Buddhist mythology tells the tale of Buddha's enlightenment. In
the beginning Buddha is a plump, rich fellow living in an opulent
palace. Occasionally, on his walks around the grounds, he spies, through
fissures in the palace walls, the world of suffering, pain and disease. He
is repulsed, but also mesmerized. Eventually, he decides to leave the
palace and live in that real world. There's a lesson here for jammers
about how to snap the First World out of its media- consumer trance.
Each time the flow of images and information is interrupted — by any
spontaneous, individual act, or any act of mass-media detournement —
it's like the Buddha catching a glimpse through the palace wall. Over
time — say five or ten years — the glimpses add up to a fairly detailed pic-
ture of life outside the palace.

If enough people saw the light and undertook spontaneous acts at
once, the Situationists believed, the result would be a mass awakening
that would suddenly devalue the currency of the spectacle. "The
detournement of the right sign, in the right place at the right time,
could spark a mass reversal of perspective," Greil Marcus said. Suddenly,
the spectacle would be exposed in all its emptiness. Everyone would see
through it.

This is how the spell is broken. This is how the revolution begins: A
few people start slipping out of old patterns, daydreaming, questioning,
rebelling. What happens naturally then, the Situationists believed, is a
groundswell of support for this new way of being, with more and more
people empowered to perform new gestures "unencumbered by his-
tory." The new generation, the Situationists believed, "would leave noth-
ing to chance."

Those words still haunt us. The society of spectacle has triumphed.
The American dream has devolved into exactly the vacant obliviousness
they talked about — a have-a-nice-day kind of happiness that close
examination tends to disturb. If you keep up appearances, keep yourself

The Revolutionary Impulse 109

diverted with new acquisitions and constant entertainments, keep your-
self pharmacologized and recoil the moment you feel real life seeping in
between the cracks, you'll be all right.
Some dream.

If the old American dream was about prosperity, maybe the new
one will be about spontaneity.

The Situationists maintained that ordinary people have all the
tools they need for revolution. The only thing missing is a perceptual
shift — a tantalizing glimpse of a new way of being — that suddenly
brings everything into focus.

THE NEW ACTIVISM (FIRE IN THE BELLY)

You may already be a culture jammer. Maybe you're a student who does
not want a career working for corporate America. A graphic artist tired
of selling your soul to ad agency clients. A vegan. A biker. A maverick
professor. An Earth Firster who liberated a billboard last night.

We jammers are a loose global network of artists, activists, envi-
ronmentalists, Green entrepreneurs, media-literacy teachers, down-
shifters, reborn Lefties, high-school shit disturbers, campus rabble-rousers,
dropouts, incorrigibles, poets, philosophers, ecofeminists. We cover the
spectrum from the cool intellectual middle to the violent lunatic fringe,
from Raging Grannies who chant doggerel at protests to urban guerril-
las who stage wild street parties. We are ecological economists, TV jam-
mers, ethical investors. We paint our own bike lanes, reclaim streets,
"skull" Calvin Klein ads, and paste GREASE stickers on tables and trays
at McDonald's restaurants. We organize swap meets, rearrange items on
supermarket shelves, make our software available free on the Net, and
generally apply ourselves to the daily business of getting consumer cul-
ture to bite its own tail. We're idealists, anarchists, guerrilla tacticians,
hoaxers, pranksters, neo-Luddites, malcontents and punks. We are the

112 Culture Jam

ragtag remnants of oppositional culture — what's left of the revolution-
ary impulse in the jaded "fin de millenium atmosphere of postmoder-
nity" in which revolution is said to be no longer possible. What we share
is an overwhelming rage against consumer capitalism, and a vague
sense that our time has come to act as a collective force.

On the simplest level, we are a growing band of people who have
given up on the American dream. Here are a few samples of the way we
think:

• Instead of treating vegetative, corporate-driven TV culture as
something to be gently, ironically mocked, it's time to face the
whole ugly specter of our TV-addicted nation, the savage anomie
of a society entranced and entrapped and living a lie. It's time to
admit that chronic TV watching is North America's number one
mental health problem, and that a society in which citizens spend a
quarter of their waking lives (more than four hours a day) in front
of their sets is in serious need of shock therapy.

• We recycle our beer cans, newspapers and vodka bottles; we join
car pools and food co-ops; we turn our thermostats down at night.
We do all the right things. So why do our environmental problems
just keep getting worse? Maybe it's time we stopped expending our
energies on small do-goody gestures and faced the fact that many
of the paradigms within which we live — cultural, social, eco-
nomic — are outdated and dysfunctional. Most of our environmen-
tal "solutions" are red herrings. They deflect energy from the
essential work at hand. What we need is not just fewer cars on the
roads but new cities designed chiefly with pedestrians, bicycles and
public transport in mind. Not just new ecofriendly products, but
new consumption patterns and new lifestyles. Not just a carbon
tax, but a global across-the-board pricing system that tells the eco-
logical truth. Not just new measures of economic progress more
accurate than the GDP, but a radical rethinking of the neoclassical
paradigm we've been teaching in Economics 101 for the past few
generations.

The New Activism (Fire in the Belly)

113

• Ours is a society filled with exceptional individuals, affluent com-
munities, efficient businesses, top-notch universities and exciting
cities. But that is no longer enough. The concept of excellence must
now be applied to the whole culture. We have never been afraid of
getting tough with the other broken systems in our lives; we retrain
workers, dump governments, and eagerly, completely revamp
entire corporate cultures such as IBM's when they lose their sense
of mission. Now let's apply that same sense of focused urgency to
the repair of our culture.

Let's rethink our vital components — our information delivery
systems, our basic ideas about nutrition, transportation and
economics. Let's commit, totally, passionately, to reducing our
ecological footprint, to learning how to measure progress accu-
rately, to countering the information viruses spreading in our
midst. Instead of resisting this kind of fundamental change, let's
embrace it. Let's cheer on our cultural rebels even as we fear
them. Let's revel in (or at least not shy away from) the life and
death of our paradigms.

But more exactly, more precisely, what do we culture jammers
actually stand for? What do we want? Perhaps the best way to explain
and define ourselves is to be clear about who — or what — we aren't.

We're Not Cool

"Cool" used to mean unique, spontaneous, compelling. The coolest kid
was the one everyone wanted to be like but no one quite could, because
her individuality was utterly distinct. Then "cool" changed. Marketers
got hold of it and reversed its meaning. Now you're cool if you are not
unique — if you have the look and feel that bear the unmistakable stamp
of America™. Hair by Paul Mitchell. Khakis by The Gap. Car by BMW.
Attitude by Nike. Pet phrases by Letterman. Politics by Bill Maher. Cool
is the opiate of our time, and over a couple of generations, we have
grown dependent on it to maintain our identities of inclusion.

114 Culture Jam

Legitimately cool people instinctively understand that the psychol-
ogy of subservience — getting corporately seduced — is a chicken-ass
way to live. Today, such people are an endangered species.

What's cool now? Same as always: It's cool to rebel. But a lot of peo-
ple who think they're rebelling, aren't. It's quite a trick the Culture Trust
has pulled off, to offer, as The Baffler editor Tom Frank puts it, "Estab-
lishment and Resistance in one convenient package." We think we're
buying anarchy when what we're actually buying is just corporate-
crafted conformity. We're buying a rebel template instead of creating
our own.

Let's face it: When you dress to the nines, drive to the max and
order a bottle of Cabernet Sauvignon that costs more than a weekend in
New England, you're just showing off. And, as Harvard economist Juliet
Schor pointed out in The Overspent American, showing off in this way
is, ultimately, a political act.

An increasing number of people are growing uncomfortable with
the gulf between the world's rich and poor. Ostentatiously splashing
your money around simply draws attention to that disparity, and to
your own position on the lucky high ground. It suggests a callousness,
an inhumanity, a let's-just-rub-their-noses-in-it arrogance.

Inegalitarianism and exclusiveness are not cool. First World opu-
lence is not cool. A culture that keeps hyping people to consume more is
not cool. America™ is not cool. And the people who fall for the hype are
the worst kind of uncool: They're suckers.

We're Not Slackers

The generation of North Americans born between 1965 and 1980 — in
Canadian writer Hal Niedzviecki's coinage, the "Malaise Generation" —
seems to have pretty much given up hope that any good will come of
this place called Earth. Taken as a group (and there are of course some
exceptional overachievers within this group — exceptions that prove the
rule), this generation represents the biggest waste of potential energy,
passion, creativity and intellect in our time. This generation, which in

The New Activism (Fire in the Belly) 115
primitive societies would have done the bulk of the tribe's work, has
voluntarily removed itself from the collective effort because . . . hey,
what's the point? Slackers spend days on end sharpening their sardonic
edge on the whetstone of apathy. They philosophize on the meaning of
a Kraft Dinner, they fish Hush Puppies from the discount bins of Wal-
Mart or, in a burst of inspiration, they issue zines with names like
A.d.i.d.a.s {All Day I Dream About Suicide). To slackers, the worst crime
is to admit to being committed to anything, because then you appear
earnest, and earnest ain't ironic. It ain't cool. So maybe it's better just to
drift down to Santa Monica, to "sit beside the ocean and watch the
world die."

Meanwhile, on the American campus — the great waiting room, the
traditional place for radical demonstrations to rage — not much is hap-
pening. While Indonesian, Chinese, and Korean students fight corrup-
tion and injustice and shake up their nations, North American
undergrads doze in the library. There's no real rush to finish a degree
because what lies on the other side but debt, pavement pounding and
the potential shame of boomeranging back home?

Members of the Malaise Generation understand that they — we —
are all dupes of the consumer culture. They understand. They just
aren't willing to do anything about it. And that's where I lose patience
with them; that's when an irrepressible anger wells up. "Life sucks."
Okay. So fix a small corner of it. When so much is at stake, how can
you be so complacent?

We're Not Academic

Why do we feel so confused and uncertain? Where do our malaise and
cynicism come from? What's wrong with the affluent West? There's
been no shortage of analysis. In academic journals and on TV panel
shows, scientists and pundits offer their theories and explanations.
They've studied the psychological and physical dimensions of the prob-
lem and laid the cards on the table. Mood disorders are rising and male
sperm counts are falling, due to chemical pollution of our air, water and

116 Culture Jam

food. But the scientists warn us not to confuse correlation with causation,
not to jump to conclusions. A full understanding of these recent phe-
nomena requires further research, more testing, more funds. The global
temperature is rising because our cars are pumping too much carbon
into the atmosphere. But we cannot allow ourselves to get too alarmed
just yet. We need to study this further before we can be sure. There are
links between exposure to diesel fumes and asthma, between chronic
TV viewing and the desire to snooze all day. This merits serious investi-
gation. Many areas of our society can be shown to be deficient in all
manner of ways and here, ladies and gentlemen, are the graphs.

Moat academics just ramble. Far too few raise a fist or a voice.
Communications professors tell their students everything that's wrong
with the global media monopoly, but never a word about how to fix it.
Economics professors drone on endlessly about their macroeconomic
models while in the real world we live off the planet's natural capital
and the backs of future generations.

We in the affluent West — the children of Socrates, Plato, Pascal,
Descartes, Hegel, Nietzsche, Marx and Wittgenstein — now live almost
exclusively in the left cortex of our brains. The dominant personality in
our culture is the logic freak: the macroeconomist, the biotechnician,
the investment guru, the computer whiz; the dispassionate thinker.
Mesmerized by binary options — black and white, good and bad, right
and wrong, heaven and hell, 1 and — we've become a McLaughlin
Group culture. We just talk. We don't actually do anything. And why
should we? Why would the people living the cushiest lives on the planet
want anything to change? Why should we spoil our sinecure when we
can pretend to be deeply concerned, keep the analysis humming and the
big salaries and consulting fees rolling in?

Thousands of delegates descend on Rio, Kyoto and New York City
for the Earth summits, generating tons of garbage and exhaust. Strong
statements are made, reams of reports are generated. The delegates
enjoy multicourse dinners of regional cuisine. Nothing changes.

Nonexperts — regular reasonable people — are disgusted by all this
dithering. They already have a pretty good idea of what's going on. They

The New Activism (Fire in the Belly) 117
can tell by the issues their politicians choose not to address. By the hur-
ricanes and floods that signal a rearrangement of the heavy furniture of
the ecosystem. By the surge of robotic consumption in the malls at
Christmastime. By the way their kids' expressions grow vacant by the
third hour of television viewing.

Abbie Hoffman nailed it when, after being told that academics and
experts were busy analyzing the subject of "subversive activity," he said:
"What the fuck you analyzin' for, man? Get in and do it!" And Edward
Abbey nailed it when he said: "Sentiment without action is the ruin of
the soul."

We're Not Feminists

I remember well how passionate, exciting and outrageous feminists
were in the '60s and 70s, how they challenged just about every aspect of
the way we lived. Most clearly, I remember the hope and direction they
gave me and my generation.

But, perhaps a casualty of its own considerable success, feminism
has now become an ideology, a strangely irrelevant "ism" stuck in
another era, too narrowly focused on its own special interests and
increasingly divided against itself. I knew feminism was in trouble
about ten years ago when I saw a WOMEN ONLY sign hanging over a
drop-in center doorway at Vancouver's Simon Fraser University. Relent-
less attention to small, self-serving issues has deflected attention from
the broader questions of what's fundamentally wrong with our culture
as a whole. For too many of the feminists I meet today, at conferences,
brainstorming sessions and in my work as editor of Adbusters, every-
thing automatically boils down to a gender issue. I just can't buy that.

Feminism still holds great intellectual power, and I am sure it will
continue to play a crucial role in softening up the male fiefdoms of sci-
ence, medicine and philosophy, and in promoting holism and a more
intimate relationship with the natural world. Recently, the insightful
audacity of a few eco- and cyberfeminists — Suzi Gablik, Donna Har-
away and Sadie Plant among them — has surprised and delighted me

118 Culture Jam

and reminded me of the old glory days. Perhaps they, and others like
them, will rise above the current self- absorption of feminist politics and
unleash a new wave of cultural excitement over the world. But, by and
large, feminism today has ceased being a broad-based social movement
and become just one of many special interest "victim" groups vying for
a piece of the money and the action.

We're Not Lefties

Many jammers, including myself, were raised on, embraced and felt
most comfortable with the ideas of the Left. But for about fifteen years
now, the Left has been letting us down. It has become tired, self-satisfied
and dogmatic. (I think of Allen Ginsberg, who found that his mother's
simplistic Left-wing views left him suspicious of both sides.) Back in the
'50s and '60s, the Left was visionary and fearless. Today the fire in its
belly has gone out. It isn't getting the job done.
What happened?

Certainly, the collapse of the Soviet empire undermined the Left's
whole philosophical base. Government control, central planning, public
ownership (and by extension the welfare state and social democracy)
were all shown to be fundamentally flawed. Today, nations are purging
these ideological remnants and adopting free-market philosophies.
Those philosophies are also seriously flawed, but they are far better than
centralized government control of every aspect of economic life. When
I saw the wholesale ecological devastation that the Communist era had
left behind, I stopped calling myself a Lefty right then and there.

But old Lefties die hard.

We find in Mother Jones, The Nation, Z, Extra, The Multinational
Monitor and dozens of Left-sprung books, magazines and newsletters
the same old authors repeating the same old ideas of yesteryear. It isn't
that many of these writers aren't fine journalists, or don't have a solid
grasp of the issues, it's just that they lack passion. There's something
drab and predictable about them; they feel like losers. (This reminds me
of my Japanese friends in Tokyo at the peak of their economic miracle

The New Activism (Fire in the Belly) 119

circa 1970, scratching their heads in amazement when I showed them a
picture of Jesus Christ on the cross. "This cannot be a god," they said.
"He looks too much like a loser to be a god.")

Each year Sonoma State University issues its list of the ten most
censored stories of the year (the endeavor has spun off to Canada as
well), but "Project Censored" is shouting into a void, and the list of
censored stories it picks every year reads like yet another ideological
wish list. The Public Interest Research Group (PIRG) system set up in
universities by Ralph Nader's Raiders twenty-five years ago is still
chugging along on the tired steam of its old agendas, but its bravest
battles are behind it. Many of the Left's great inspirational voices —
Lasch, Berger, Heilbroner, Galbraith — have died or are in extremis. The
vacuum has been filled by tenured professors, TV pundits and self-pro-
claimed champions of oppositional culture. I've had dealings with
many of these people: They no longer pine for real change. For them
fundamental change is just a Utopian dream, and if it suddenly hap-
pened they wouldn't know what to do with it. They're content to give
another speech at another symposium, or write yet another humorless
article ridiculing the far Right. Left activists, even some of the best,
have been reduced to the level of little kids throwing snowballs at pass-
ing cars.

Harper's editor Lewis Lapham is the quintessential liberal Lefty.
Every month he passionately and often eloquently dissects the moral
state of the union. But when Adbusters challenged him on the ethics of
running tobacco advertisements in his own magazine, he steadfastly
refused to be drawn into the debate. For years he stonewalled our let-
ters, phone calls and entreaties, and played a cat-and-mouse game with
us in the media. He couldn't face up to a moral indignity in his own
yard.

The liberal Left has a way of co-opting every worthwhile cause. In
the past few decades, it has hung its flag on the black movement, the
women's movement and the environmental movement. It has muscled
in on every major struggle and social protest of the past half century.
But no longer are Lefties fighting the problem, they are the problem,

The New Activism (Fire in the Belly) 121

and if we're going to build an effective new social movement, we're
going to have to work not with them but around them.

The critical issues of our time are neither Left nor Right, neither male
nor female, neither black nor white. The challenge for new millennium
activists is to find the courage to let go of all their old orthodoxies,
"isms" and sacred cows, and to commit to "a ruthless criticism of all
that exists." And after that, the big challenge is to bring revolutionary
consciousness and contestation back into the modern world by stand-
ing up and boldly announcing to the world what Parisian rebels
declared some thirty years ago: "We will wreck this world."

THE MEME WARS

A meme (rhymes with "dream") is a unit of information (a catchphrase,
a concept, a tune, a notion of fashion, philosophy or politics) that leaps
from brain to brain to brain. Memes compete with one another for
replication, and are passed down through a population much the same
way genes pass through a species. Potent memes can change minds,
alter behavior, catalyze collective mindshifts and transform cultures.
Which is why meme warfare has become the geopolitical battle of our
information age. Whoever has the memes has the power.

Activists can stage sit-ins, organize massive protests and stage
mighty battles with riot police. But these events will at best flicker
briefly on the evening news and be gone with no demonstrable change
in the world. They are spectacles with radium half-lives. The real riots,
the important ones that shift alliances, shake governments, win (or
lose) elections and force corporations and industries to rethink their
agendas, now take place inside your head.

The next revolution — World War III — will be, as Marshall
McLuhan predicted, "a guerrilla information war" fought not in the sky
or on the streets, not in the forests or around international fishing

124 Culture Jam

boundaries on the high seas, but in newspapers and magazines, on the
radio, on TV and in cyberspace. It will be a dirty, no-holds-barred pro-
paganda war of competing worldviews and alternative visions of the
future.

We jammers can win this battle for ourselves and for Planet Earth.
Here's how:

We build our own meme factory, put out a better product and beat
the corporations at their own game. We identify the macromemes and
the metamemes — the core ideas without which a sustainable future is
unthinkable — and deploy them.

Here are five of the most potent metamemes currently in the cul-
ture jammer's arsenal:

True Cost: In the global marketplace of the future, the price of
every product will tell the ecological truth.

Demarketing: The marketing enterprise has now come full circle.
The time has come to unsell the product and turn the incredible
power of marketing against itself.

The Doomsday Meme: The global economy is a doomsday
machine that must be stopped and reprogrammed.

No Corporate "I": Corporations are not legal "persons" with con-
stitutional rights and freedoms of their own, but legal fictions that
we ourselves created and must therefore control.

Media Carta: Every human being has the "right to communi-
cate" — to receive and impart information through any media.

What would happen if even 10 percent of North Americans came
to believe in and support even one of these ideas? Life would change.
The ready-for-prime-time metameme — the big paradigm-busting idea
that suddenly captures the public imagination and becomes a super-
spectacle in itself — is the meme-warfare equivalent of a nuclear bomb.
It causes cognitive dissonance of the highest order. It jolts people out of

The Meme Wars 125

their habitual patterns and nudges society in brave new directions.

The last time social activists ventured wholesale into TV, they won
a magnificent victory. I'm talking about the tobacco war, which history
will record as having begun in the 1960s and having ended around the
turn of the millennium, with the tobacco giants finally rolling over. The
tobacco war marked the first (and so far the last) time anti-ads beat
product ads in open meme combat in a free marketplace of ideas.

Here was a multibillion-dollar industry butting heads with the
fledgling antitobacco lobby. In 1969, the antitobacco crusaders, through
persistent efforts and relentless pressure, managed to secure airtime for
their antismoking ads, which ran against the cigarette ads that were
then still legal on TV.

I remember those ads vividly — the superclose-ups of the glowing
tips of cigarettes, the X rays of cruddy lungs. I remember Yul Brynner,
whose last creative act in the world, after a slow disintegration from
lung cancer, was to come on TV just months from death, look the world
squarely in the.eye and say, "Whatever you do, don't smoke." That meme
forged the link between cigarettes and death. Everybody watching knew
it was the truth. Those anti-ads helped me and millions of others to quit
smoking. More significantly, they demonstrated that even a multibil-
lion-dollar cartel can be beaten in a free marketplace of ideas.

The antismoking meme crushed the smoking meme. Even with all
its financial might, the tobacco industry was simply unable to compete
because it lost its psychological stranglehold on the public mind. It lost
its magic. Smoking was uncooled, and no amount of PR money could
buy the cool back. In 1971, the tobacco companies "voluntarily"
accepted a federal ban on TV and radio cigarette advertising, and their
ads have not appeared in those media since.

For the antismoking lobby — early culture jammers — beating the
enemy on TV was the key. The victory initiated the great social turn-
around of the next twenty years, with smokers in increasing numbers
being driven out of the temple.

Today a new generation of jammers is inspired by that victory. If
the mighty tobacco industry was vulnerable to calculated, well-researched,

A woman's hand sensually
caresses a shiny new car.

Suddenly, the car morphs into
an Autosaurus, a terrifying
robotic dinosaur, made of
hulks of old cars.

Voice: "It's coming, it's coming ■
the most significant event in
automotive history , , .
the end of the age of the
automobile."

The Autosaurus screeches and
collapses into a heap.

Voice:

"Imagine a world with less cars."

The Meme Wars 127

tactical assaults by TV activists, then surely such subversive efforts can
be repeated with success on other dysfunctional industries.

Jammers are now mobilizing to repeat the tobacco story in many
other areas of life. We're going to take on the global automakers, the
chemical companies, the food industries, the fashion corporations and
the pop-culture marketeers in a free-information environment. We
believe we can launch a new brand and beat America™ in a meme war.
We're better organized and much smarter than we were twenty-five
years ago. I like our odds.

We will take on the
archetypal mind polluters
and heat them at their
own game.

We will unoool their
billion-dollar brands
with uncommercials
on TV, subvertisements
in magazines and anti-ads
right next to theirs in
the urban landscape.

We will seize control of
the roles and functions
that corporations play
in our lives and set new
agendas in their industries.

We will jam the pop-culture
marketeers and bring their
image factory to a sudden,
shuddering halt.

On the rubble of the old
culture, we will build a new
one with a non-commercial
heart and soul.

THE MEME WARRIOR

Next time you're in a particularly soul-searching mood, ask yourself this
simple question: What would it take for me to make a spontaneous,
radical gesture in support of something I believe in? Do I believe in any-
thing strongly enough? What would it take for me to say, This may not
be nice, it may not be considerate, it may not even be rational — but
damn it, I'm going to do it anyway because it feels right? I'm going to
take this pair of scissors and cut my credit card in half. I'm going to take
this little doll I've bought out of its huge box, right here at Toys "R" Us,
and leave the wasteful packaging on the counter. Next time I'm caught
standing in a long line at the bank, I'm going to shout cheerfully: "Hey,
how about opening another teller!"

Direct action is a proclamation of personal independence. It hap-
pens, for the first time, at the intersection of your self-consciousness
and your tolerance for being screwed over. You act. You thrust yourself
forward and intervene. And then you hang loose and deal with whatever
comes. In that moment of decision, in that leap into the unknown, you
come to life. Your interior world is suddenly vivid. You're like a cat on
the prowl: alive, alert and still a little wild.

130 Culture Jam

It's fun to wrestle with titans. It's exhilarating to throw a megacor-
poration like McDonald's or Nike or Calvin Klein to the mat with the
awesome momentum of its own icons and marketing hype — leveraging
the very brand recognition the company so painstakingly built over the
years. It's a fascinating exercise to take on a cartel like the global
automakers and try to make it question its mandate. It's empowering to
try to force a whole academic discipline like neoclassical economics to
rethink its axioms.

In any such fight the underdog is perfectly positioned to take risks
and test theories. Culture jammers are continually trying out new
strategic ploys in the meme wars. Here are a few we've found so far.

Leverage Points

Almost every social problem, no matter how seemingly intractable, can
be solved with enough time, scrutiny and effort. There's always some lit-
tle fissure you can squeeze a crowbar into and heave. That's the leverage
point. When pressure is applied there, memes start replicating, minds
start changing and, in time, the whole culture moves.

There's a story often told by systems analysts — including Donella
Meadows, coauthor of Limits to Growth — to illustrate how a little action
at a system's leverage point can make all the difference in the world. The
manager of a housing co-op was growing increasingly frustrated with
her tenants. No matter how much she reminded and badgered them, no
matter how many meetings she convened, no matter how much good-
will there was for the task, the tenants would not, could not reduce their
energy consumption. Finally she hit on an idea. What would happen,
she wondered, if the electricity meters were moved from the basement
to a conspicuous spot right beside the front door, so that each time the
tenants left or entered their home they could see how fast their meter
was whirring?

The meters were moved. Lo and behold, within a few weeks elec-
tricity consumption fell 30 percent.

This tale inspires culture jammers because it reminds us of what

The Meme Warrior 131

our movement is all about: finding that leverage point. Something is
wrong; it can be fixed, but the fix requires seeing the situation in a novel
way. "It's not a parameter adjustment, not a strengthening or weakening
of an existing loop," says Meadows. "It's a new loop delivering feedback
to a place where it wasn't going before."

How do you get society to make do with fewer cars? You can
encourage people to make bicycles a bigger part of their lives. You can
organize "Bike to Work" weeks. You can pay employers to subsidize
commuters who pedal in from the suburbs. All of these things will cer-
tainly help. But the leverage point may turn out to be an idea that
uncools one of the core rituals of car culture — the Indy 500. We
uncooled beauty pageants, why not Indy races? Both are relics of a
bygone era.

Other examples abound. When citizens are in the grip of fashion
chic, you can "skull" fashion billboards, you can organize national
"Fashin' Bashin' Weeks," you can point people toward thrift stores. But
if you concentrate your energies on one fashion mogul — I suggest
Calvin Klein — and try to uncool his line and logo, then you may have
found a way to leverage the whole industry. An activist-induced drop in
cK sales of even a few percent would signal that the tables have turned.

Leverage points are easier to find if you brainstorm and are ready
to act on a grand scale. Why not go head to head with the junk-food
industry on TV? Why not take legal action against TV broadcasters who
won't sell you airtime? Why not take your case to the World Court? Why
not try to launch a global media reform movement? Why not try to
revoke Philip Morris's corporate charter?

D etou rnement

Corporations advertise. Culture jammers subveitise. A well-produced
print "subvertisement" mimics the look and feel of the target ad,
prompting the classic double take as viewers realize what they're seeing
is in fact the very opposite of what they expected. Subvertising is potent
mustard. It cuts through the hype and glitz of our mediated reality

132 Culture Jam

and momentarily, tantalizingly, reveals the hollow spectacle within.

Suppose you don't have the money to launch a real print ad cam-
paign. What you can do is mimic the million-dollar look and feel of
your opponent's campaign, thereby detourning their own carefully
worked out, button-pushing memes in your favor. They spend millions
building their corporate cool, and you keep stealing their electricity.

Cyberjamming

The Internet is one of the most potent meme-replicating mediums ever
invented. With cyberspace growing at about the rate of an infant — dou-
bling in size every ten months — and with users always looking to pass
on a scoop, good memes reproduce furiously. In 1997, Buy Nothing Day
grew from a relatively small counterculture event in the Pacific North-
west to one of the biggest outbursts of anticonsumer sentiment the
world has ever seen. Anyone with a PC and a modem could go to the
Media Foundation's website (www.adbusters.org), download a Buy
Nothing Day poster and a T-shirt template, and view quicktime ver-
sions of the Buy Nothing Day TV campaign. And hundreds of thou-
sands did.

Cyberjamming is evolving at a dizzying pace. Here are a few inter-
esting techniques in use at the time of this writing:

Cyberpetitions

Don't wear out your shoes trying to collect hard-copy signatures in per-
son. Instead, use the Internet to gain immediate access to millions of
like-minded souls to consider your proposal, sign your petition and e-
mail it back to you.

Virtual Protests

Link people who visit your website directly to the site of your quarry (be
it Monsanto, McDonald's, Philip Morris or NBC), where they can find
creative ways to lodge a protest.

The Meme Warrior 133
Virtual Sit-ins

Immobilize an enemy site by organizing a few dozen cyberjammers
simultaneously to request more texts, pictures, animations and multi-
media elements than the site can handle.

Gripe Sites

Create and maintain a site dedicated to uncooling one particular corpo-
ration or brand.

TV Jamming

A fifteen-, thirty- or sixty-second TV spot created by a team of passion-
ate filmmakers is, I believe, the most powerful of all the weapons in the
culture jammer's arsenal. I sometimes call a well-conceived and
-produced social marketing TV message a "mindbomb" because of how
it explodes in the collective psyche, sending out shock waves of cogni-
tive dissonance. An effective TV subvertisement (or uncommercial) is
so unlike what surrounds it on the commercial-TV mindscape that it
immediately grabs the attention of viewers. It breaks their media-
consumer trance and momentarily challenges their whole world out-
look. It's guerrilla meme warfare on the most powerful social
communications medium of our time. It can catch whole industries by
surprise, trigger government policy reviews, derail legislation, launch
new political initiatives. A thirty-second TV campaign is a legitimate
way for a private citizen or activist group to challenge government, cor-
porate and industrial agendas. And the idea that you have the right to do
that in a democracy is utterly empowering.

Hundreds of protesters in front of a McDonald's may or may not
make the local evening news, but a relatively modest national TV cam-
paign (for example, twelve spots costing $2,500 each on CNN's Head-
line News), pointing out that a Big Mac contains over 50 percent fat, can
strike to the heart of the fast-food industry. A cheeky anticar spot, aired
repeatedly during international Indy and Nascar broadcasts, can begin
to unnerve the global automakers. An uncommercial that fingers the

134 Culture Jam

global economy as a doomsday machine, aired during the weeks leading
up to a G-7 summit meeting, can trigger a worldwide debate about
unsustainable overconsumption by the affluent "First" nations of the
world.

Eventually, we will have access to the airwaves. We will have the
"right to communicate" with each other in a free information environ-
ment. In the meantime, TV jamming is still a win-win strategy: If you
are able to buy time and get your ad aired, you win by delivering your
message to hundreds of thousands of attentive viewers. If the networks
refuse to sell you airtime, you publicize that fact. Now you have a news
story (the media are always willing to expose a dirty little secret) that
will prompt debate in your community about access to the public air-
waves and perhaps draw more attention to your cause than if the net-
works had simply sold you the airtime in the first place.

The Industrial Pincer

Squirming out from under a big, dysfunctional industry that's control-
ling some aspect of our lives and setting new agendas in that industry
requires more than just a hot TV spot and a little ad hoc anger. Breaking
the auto industry's hold on our transportation and environmental poli-
cies, or the food industry's hold on our nutritional agendas, or the fash-
ion industry's hold on what constitutes attractiveness requires protracted
meme warfare on many fronts over many years. The "pincer strategy" is
a way to organize the forces. You apply it as follows:

1. You attack the industry from above with hard-hitting media thrusts.
You break its unchallenged run on television by airing dissenting ads.
You run subverts and spoofs in magazines. You place anti-ads right
next to their ads in the urban landscape.

2. Simultaneously, you attack from below. You lobby at the grassroots
level. You contact citizens' groups (cyclists, vegans, women's groups,
Christians against TV violence, Green entrepreneurs) and catalyze

The Meme Warrior 135

actions (anticar rallies, street parties, stickering campaigns, Fashin'
Bashin' Weeks, cyberpetitions) calculated to attract press and TV cov-
erage.

3. You apply the pincer to the industry and don't let up for at least two
years.

A well-organized pincer will get millions of people thinking about
their lives — about eating better, driving less, jumping off the fashion
treadmill, downshifting. Eventually, the national mood will evolve.
Single-occupant commuters will begin to resemble the smokers of
today — outsiders, even villains. People scarfing a Big Mac, Coke and
fries for lunch will feel a little guilty, a little sick, a little stupid. Teenagers
wearing Nike caps and Calvin Klein jeans won't feel so trendy anymore.

That's when these industries will change. That's when the global
automakers will suddenly realize there's no future in single-occupant
commuting. When McDonald's stops trying to sell another generation
on a deep-fried, high-fat diet. When the beauty myth loses its hold.
That's when the corporate cool machine suddenly starts spluttering,
and, in a great surge of self-determination, we the people stand up and
reclaim our culture.

In my more melodramatic moments over the last ten years, I have
let myself imagine the culture-jamming crusade building to a single,
almost solemn moment of reckoning, like the scene in Shakespeare's
Henry V where the king summons his troops before the battle of Agin-
court and delivers the gut-check talk:

And gentlemen in England now a-bed
Shall think themselves accursed they were not here
And hold their manhoods cheap whiles any speaks
That fought with us upon Saint Crispin's day.

It's not inconceivable that the culture-jamming movement will be
remembered by our grandchildren for having been one of the catalysts

136 Culture Jam

of the great planetary transformation that shook the world in the early
years of the new millennium. By that time, the neoclassical-economics
spell will have been broken, and the fight to wrest sovereign power from
corporations will be largely won. The freedom and cultural empower-
ment our grandkids enjoy will be the one we fought for, and won.
"What did you do?" they will ask us. "Were you there when Philip Mor-
ris Inc. bit the dust? When the True-Cost Party of America won the elec-
tion? When the 'right to communicate' was enshrined in the Universal
Declaration of Human Rights?"

And then, like King Henry, we will strip our sleeves and show our
scars.

summer

RAGE

Rage — call it wrath, if you like, or righteous anger — is good. When it
wells up suddenly from deep inside you, it's immediate, compelling,
real. It's the only emotion strong enough to start a war or (think Viet-
nam protests) stop one. When it springs from personal frustration, rage
brings about low-level justice. It gets the boiler in your building fixed,
the loud upstairs neighbor evicted, the reckless driver fined, your delin-
quent teenage daughter grounded. When it springs from a sense of
moral affront, it brings profound change. It stops cosmetics testing on
animals, toughens juvenile crime laws, improves working conditions on
factory floors and topples governments.
Rage drives revolutions.

It used to be easier to work up a good rage. It used to be easy to fig-
ure out whom you were raging at, even if that was everyone and every-
thing. ("What're you rebelling against?" they asked the young Marlon
Brando. "Whadd'ya got?" he replied.) These days there are fewer obvi-
ous lightning rods for rage, fewer out-and-out villains. The people
you're most inclined to get roaring mad at — sales clerks, phone solici-
tors, loan officers — are often just front-line agents in a corporate

UO Culture Jam

megasystem. It's the system, not its agents, that is the problem. Trying to
get personal with a system is like trying to get personal with a broken
toaster. You just end up feeling stupid, because your rage makes no dif-
ference at all.

The overarching "system" these days is consumer capitalism,
which since World War II, Americans have understood to be the solu-
tion to the country's woes, not the source of them. Capitalism has
always been sold to us as our ticket to freedom, the antidote to the hell-
ish bureaucracy of communism. But consumer capitalism — the society
of spectacle — can be an even more insidious form of social control
than communism, which is simply paternalism run amok. Commu-
nism is blunt and obvious, like a blow with a club. Capitalism's con-
sumer culture cannibalizes your spirit over time, it puts you to work as
an obedient "slave component" of the system without your ever even
knowing it.

Imagine you're flaked out on the couch watching TV. You're very
relaxed, the way a hypnotized patient is relaxed. Gradually, you feel your
energy, or at least your desire to do anything but continue to watch,
draining away. You are warm and insensate. But as drug experiences go,
this is less than blissful. After a few hours you know something is wrong.
You want to get up, but can't. You think you might be going crazy.
Someone is doing this to you. Someone is sucking you dry. But who?
The guy who owns the network (Michael Eisner)? The guy who dreams
up this dreck (Aaron Spelling)? The doofus who delivers it (David Has-
selhoff)? Or do you blame yourself? You're complicit — tuning in, keep-
ing the numbers up, feeding the machine. What we have here is a kind
of diffusion of responsibility. It's the same phenomenon that allows sol-
diers in wartime to rationalize away any self-blame for the atrocities
going on around them. Being a tiny gear in a vast engine of responsibil-
ity gets you off the hook. If everyone's a villain — if we are all caught in
the media-consumer trance — then no one is to blame. It's hard to gen-
erate any good, focused anger in these circumstances, but it's very, very
easy to get depressed.

Bit by bit since the '50s, the spectacle has swallowed us up. We

Rage 141

don't trust the reality of our desires anymore. We've grown cynical and
afraid. We've forgotten what it feels like to get angry — how to do rage.
We listen to that ultraconservative part of our brain that says: Hold
back, be reasonable, things aren't so bad. We've lost touch with our
inner Peter Finch, the part of ourselves that throws open the window
and screams into the street, "I'm mad as hell and I'm not going to take
it anymore!" Instead, we lie in front of our TVs like beaten dogs. We
toady to corporations and wear their brand logos like serfs. We breathe
bad air, drink foul water, lick corporate lollipops and never let out
a peep.

Why are we so docile and obedient? Is it because there's just not as
much to fight for? Hardly. There has never been more at stake. The fate
of the planet hangs in the balance. Never in human history has so much
defiance been needed from so many. But for some strange reason we
deny our anger and sit tight.

Postmodern cynicism is rage that can no longer get it up. It is pow-
erlessness, disconnection and shame. It's the loneliest kind of rage there
is, different from the kinds of rage we've known in the past, which were
born of injustice and nurtured by a clearly identifiable enemy. Post-
modern rage is a volatile mix of strong feelings long suppressed: one
part "eco-rage," an appalled disbelief at the way human beings are
blithely destroying the natural world, and one part a profound,
information-age anger I call "psycho-rage." You may not have had a
name for this particular emotion until now, but you know if you have it.
You're bored, yet anxious. Your moods soar and dive. Barely control-
lable anger wells up without warning out of nowhere.

Psycho-rage spikes when you realize you're trapped in a carnival of
staged events: corporate America's idea of fun. It intensifies with every
hour you spend in front of the TV watching the endless parade of dra-
matized home invasions, boxing bouts, space-shuttle launches, election
debates, stock-market analyses, celebrity gossip and genocidal wars —
interrupted every few minutes by ads for cars and cosmetics and holi-
days in Hawaii. It reaches a crescendo as you realize (too late) that ever
since you were a baby crawling around that TV set, you've been propa-

THE PRODUCT IS YOU

15-SECOND TV SPOT

The camera moves slowly toward
a young man watching TV in his
living room.

Voice:

"Your living room
is the factory . . .

. . . the product being
manufactured is you."

MfME WARFARE TONIGHT l-aoo-661-IM

Rage 143

gandized and suckered, your neurons pickled in erotica, violence and
marketing hype. You have become less than what you once were. The
forces of nurture and genetics that make you a unique human being
have met equal and opposing forces trying to reduce you to an obedient
consumer. You have joined the North American consumer cult of the
insatiables. In Buddhist terminology, you have become a "hungry
ghost," with an enormous belly and pinhole-size mouth. And you will
never be truly "full" again.

The strange thing is, you don't really mind. In fact, on some level,
you're happy as a clam. You find yourself actually enjoying the ride,
savoring the spectacle. Your daily dose of circus sound-and-light dis-
solves under your tongue. You can't stop watching as the bombs land on
Baghdad. Your tears flow freely for Princess Di. You can't get enough
news about President Clinton's escapades. You press the remote and the
show goes on.

Once in a while, in a flash of insight, you understand that some-
thing is terribly, terribly wrong with your life, and that a rude and bar-
ren future awaits unless you leap up off the couch right now.

Then the moment passes. Your opening came and you didn't move.
You couldn't muster the clarity of mind to figure out what to do, let
alone the energy to do it.

And so your rage remains underground.

Rage is a signal like pain or lust. If you learn to trust it and ride
shotgun on it, watching it without suppressing it, you gain power and
lose cynicism. "Lying is the major form of human stress," the American
psychologist Brad Blanton once said, and to the extent that failure to
acknowledge your rage is really just lying to yourself, then jamming a
coin into a monopoly newspaper box or liberating a billboard in the
middle of the night can be a rather honest and joyful thing to do.

There's an anger, a rage-driven defiance, that is healthy, ethical and
empowering. It contains the conviction that change is possible — both for
you and for your antagonist. Learning how to jam our culture with this
rage may be one of the few ways left to feel truly among the quick in the
Huxleyan mindscape of new millennium capitalism.

THE SECOND AMERICAN REVOLUTION

(An Assertiveness Training Workshop for Culture Jammers)

Think of the history of the United States as a play in four acts. In the
first act, America is a puppet nation, its early settlers controlled from
afar by their British masters. In the second act, the Americans rise up. A
great revolution brings power to the people and they set up a new, more
democratic way of governing themselves that inspires the world. In the
long and tragic third act, now in its dramatic finale, America is stricken
with consumption and begins to die. Overwhelmed by corporate spec-
tacle and power, the once proud democracy devolves into a corporate
state. The people grow decadent and forget how to be free.

Now the fourth act is about to begin. It is an act of reversal,
recovery, redemption. The American people experience a great awak-
ening. Systematically, they undertake to dismantle their corporate
state and recover the sovereignty that has been lost over the last cen-
tury. "Sovereign people do not beg of, or negotiate with subordinate
entities which we created — sovereign people instruct subordinate
entities," says Richard Grossman, codirector of the Program on Cor-

146 Culture Jam

porations, Law and Democracy, one of the architects of this grand
new shift. "When a subordinate entity violates the terms of its cre-
ation, and undermines our ability to govern ourselves, we are required
to move in swiftly and accountably to cut this cancer out of the body
politic."

Act Four of the story of America is about breaking the media-
consumer trance. It's about taking the ™ out of America™. It's about
putting corporations back in the box and revoking many of the consti-
tutional rights we have granted them over the past two hundred years.
It's about calling these subordinate entities to heel.

The goal of this workshop is to spark a dramatic personal mind-
shift that will change the way you relate to corporations. Once you've
experienced this shift, you'll feel ashamed for having been so docile and
subservient for so long. Your days will be charged with a new sense of
autonomy and mission. You'll derive immense pleasure from tussling
with corporations, putting them in their place. You'll train yourself to
always take the position of power, to be mindful of the fact that you are
a human being and the corporation is merely a legal construct your
species thought up.

By the end of this section, you'll have developed skills to take
back the freedom and dignity that are rightfully yours. The mindshift
will happen gradually. Corporate agendas are so deeply woven into
our lives that it's hard to see them, much less jam them (we take cor-
porate power and privilege for granted in the same way the power and
privilege of royalty were taken for granted a hundred years ago). It's a
slow detox.

You will begin with simple acts of resistance, but in the end you
will change utterly the way you see your place in consumer culture.

In each of the following scenarios, you have two broad options:
You can roll over and squeal like a pig — i.e., act the way corporations
want you to act — or you can seize control of the situation — detourn
it — and start acting like an empowered sovereign citizen. But as we will
see, there are degrees of sovereignty. Some paths to freedom are more
direct than others.

The Second American Revolution 147

Drop Your Facade of Politeness

The telephone company sends you your monthly statement. You see it
has made a mistake and overcharged you. You call and explain your
problem to an operator. "OK, no problem, we can fix this," she says.
"Please mail or fax the bill back to us with a little note explaining the
problem, and we'll take care of it."

You can do as she asks. That's what most people do. It avoids a lot
of trouble and lets you get on with your day. It also means following an
arrogant corporate procedure designed to save them time and money at
your expense.

Here's the sovereign path. Drop your facade of politeness and say,
"Listen, this is your mistake, so instead of me sending the bill back to
you, why don't you send me a new bill with the adjusted amount and
then I'll pay it." Insist on your procedure, and be prepared to immedi-
ately switch servers if she refuses to go along.

In a similar vein, I know a woman who, whenever she receives an
unsolicited fax on her home fax line, replies by faxing back a jet-black
sheet of paper (which drains the memory and the toner of the machine
at the other end). She leaves only a tiny window of white that contains
this message: "Don't fax me at home again."

Learn to Detourn

It's Monday evening. The phone rings. On the line is a woman who
works for a major insurance company. Would you be interested in
receiving information about the term life plan which she understands,
by her records, may suit you, given your lifestyle and income level? She
is quite aggressive and clearly reading off a card.

Here your options are limited only by your imagination and mood
of the moment. You can listen to her spiel and then politely say no. Or
you can take the easy way out and lie ("We already have life insurance"
or, "I'm sorry, there's no one here by that name"). Or you can get real.
"All right, I'll talk to you," you might say, "but only if you stop reading

148 Culture Jam

from that card and start speaking to me like a human being." If you're
feeling sparky, you could engage her in a conversation about why she
took this telemarketing job in the first place and try to talk her into
changing jobs. Or you can tell her, truthfully, that you're busy right now,
but if you can have her home phone number you'll call her back
tonight. (When she refuses, simply say: "You called me at home, so why
can't I call you at home?") Or you can turn the tables on her by saying:
"OK, before we go any further you should know that I bill my time out
at twenty dollars an hour, with a fifteen-minute minimum, so if you
want to talk to me, it's going to cost your company at least five dollars.
The meter's running. It's your decision." That's a nifty detournement.
Once enough people start detourning corporate telemarketing thrusts
like that, it won't be so cost-effective for them to keep badgering us in
our homes.

Clear a Path for Others

One of your checks bounces. You're sure you had enough in the account
to cover it. You call up your local bank branch, the one you've been deal-
ing with for twenty years, to find out what happened. This time your
call is rerouted to a new 1-800 headquarters at the other end of the
country. You ask to speak to someone you know in your local branch.
Sorry, not possible, the operator says: All inquiries are now handled
from this new office — a cost-cutting move. But this new office doesn't
have a history with you, you argue. As of now, the operator tells you,
your history begins anew.

Again, you can take the "easy" route and just deal politely with this
new person. It would mean caving in, but you're not in the mood for an
argument and besides, how can you ever win a fight with a bank?

Consider the cost, though, of not taking this bank on. Every time
you capitulate to a corporation, you're letting down everyone who fol-
lows you on the path. If you fail to take out a bully or reprogram a bully,
the bully is free to bully again.

It's the little daily capitulations we unthinkingly allow, the lumps

The Second American Revolution 149

we swallow without comment, that have landed us in the sorry state of
subservience we're in. Every time we lump it we lose a little of our free-
dom and dignity. A lot of people who habitually give up often say, "Hey,
it's not my battle." Or, "What possible difference can I make?" It's this
attitude that allows corporations to gain the upper hand in any policy
or procedure they decide to foist upon us. The real lesson here is that no
fight is too small. Little capitulations inevitably lead to bigger ones,
while little victories lead to greater triumphs.

The way we handle daily aggravations places us on a continuum of
commitment. At one end of the continuum are little tussles on the
phone and in the bank, and at the other end are critical choices about
genetic engineering, trade rules and global warming. How we respond
personally to the small things determines to a great extent how we
respond collectively to the big things. Our everyday life is where the
revolution unfolds. That's where the real guerrilla actions take place,
and where Marshall McLuhan's World War III will eventually be won
or lost.

Learn to Confront

You're recruited by the university hockey team and discover that every-
one on the squad is required to wear a jersey with a big swoosh on the
front. The uniform is mandatory. This is a "Nike" university (meaning
Nike has forked over a lot of money and gear in return for blanket alle-
giance on campus).

Of course, it's easiest just to wear the damn swoosh and play. The
option at the other extreme is to have a blowup with the coach and quit
the team in protest.

But here's the jammer's jig. You have a little private chat with each
one of your teammates, and then call a meeting. Argue that it's degrad-
ing for hockey players to be reduced to human billboards. Then up the
ante. Paste posters. Write a story for the campus newspaper. Talk on
campus radio. Pull off a wild, attention-grabbing prank. Then demand
an audience with the university dean and faculty heads to explain your

150 Culture Jam

position. Tell them there will be hell to pay if they don't stop mixing
education with marketing.

By getting in the face of corporate America in this way, you're not
just being confrontational, you're demarketing your life, creating your
own choices and learning a whole new strategy of self-reliance. Bit by bit,
you wean yourself off name brands, switch your bank account to the
local credit union, buy what you need at locally owned stores, supple-
ment the news you usually get with alternative sources. You learn to
reward the good with your dollars and your time, and punish the bad by
refusing to buy in. You develop new habits and routines, a new attitude
that becomes engrained. You never allow a corporate rep who says "I'm
sorry, but that's company policy, sir" off the hook. Instead, you confront
her and wrestle her down on the spot. If she hangs tough, you ask to see
her boss. If he hangs tough, you go over his head. You take names, make
notes, stay cool. You never let a corporation forget who is serving whom.

Corporations have a lot of experience with (and a "procedure" for)
dealing with troublemakers like you. Decide in advance how much
you're prepared to risk. Don't pick a fight if you don't have the time to
see it through. Preplan confrontations. Decide how far you're willing to
go and what your final move will be if your ride up the company hierar-
chy hits a dead end. Are you ready to close your account at the bank?
Cancel an order? Create a public scene? Engage in civil disobedience?
Take legal action? Or will you settle for an appointment with the man-
ager next week?

As you make more and more committed choices, you will feel
more alive, free, real. Bit by bit, you'll also start winning more tussles
than you lose, and you'll discover the joy of jamming: that great, exhila-
rating power for change that every human being has.

Reframe Debates

You've decided to take the step from personal to collective action. Dis-
gusted with ongoing fast-food imperialism, you decide to join a side-
walk protest at the local McDonald's.

WHY ARE YOU BUYING YOUR FOOD FROM A TOBACCO COMPANY?

Did you know that every product pictured here is owned by Philip Morris, the world's
largest cigarette company? Chances are you've been helping to promote Marlboro
cigarettes without even knowing it. Now you can withdraw that support by personally
boycotting these products. It's like giving money to a health organization that's working
to find a cure for cancer — but in this case, you're taking money away from a corporation
that causes it. So next time you're at the supermarket-try it. You'll like it.

152 Culture Jam

Normally, these kinds of events follow a standard script. Protesters
distribute leaflets critical of the way the corporation promotes poor
nutrition and scalps the South American rain forest for pastureland.
The whole protest ritual is preframed. On one side is McDonald's, the
established and popular multibillion-dollar enterprise. On the other
side is a bunch of scruffy, long-haired reactionaries with their tired,
Lefty grievances. The protest leaders deliberately defy the police and are
arrested. Reporters show up and get a few angry quotes. A news story
finds its way into the city section of the local paper or maybe makes the
evening news. But nothing changes. McDonald's continues to open as
many new outlets as it wants, continues to hook kids via Saturday
morning cartoons, continues to spend a billion and a half dollars a year
worldwide on advertising, and continues in large part to set the planet's
nutritional agenda.

You could propose another way to organize your protest. This
time, your group walks around the restaurant in an orderly fashion. You
don't encroach on McDonald's private property. The police have no
legal reason to arrest you.

When a reporter asks, "What are you protesting against, exactly?"
you answer: "Please, let's get something straight right off the top. We're
not protesters. We're citizens of this city concerned about the way
McDonald's is marketing fast food to our children. We want to have some
say in how many fast-food restaurants there are in our neighborhoods
and what license fees they should be paying to city hall for that privilege."

Wow! Suddenly, the issue is reframed. Suddenly, this isn't a bunch
of anti-McDonald's protesters; it's a group of citizens asserting their
right to decide what happens in their city. The citizens are once again
the natives, the landowners, the original settlers, and it's their rights that
are being infringed on, not the corporation's.

The reporter who had practically written her story in advance
(" . . . insert inflammatory quote from protester here . . . ") now has that
word "protester" yanked out from under her. She will write her piece dif-
ferently now. Her ritual has been interrupted because a smart jammer
reframed the debate.

The Second American Revolution 153

And the next day a citizen will read the paper and say, "Yes, that
makes sense to me. There are too many fast-food joints around here. I like
the idea of regulating how many of them can operate in my neighbor-
hood. And fast-food franchises like McDonald's should pay bigger license
fees to city hall. Maybe we should charge them fifty thousand dollars per
year, or even more. We should be able to do that if we want to. It's our
neighborhood. It's our city. And now that I think about it, maybe we don't
need so much fast-food advertising on kids' TV shows either."

Refraining an issue is as simple as figuring out what the core issues
are. Gandhi redefined the conflict in colonial India. "The function of a
civil resistance is to provoke response," he told his people, "and we will
continue to provoke until they respond or they change the law." The
strength of refraining in this way was that "the resisters" became the
active agents and the British government became the reactive agents.
The power dynamic was inverted. From then on it was the resisters who
set the agenda.

Maintain Your Sovereignty

In the Pacific Northwest, a handful of forestry giants, granted power to
"manage" the resource, have a long history of committing all manner of
ecological crimes, from cutting at unsustainable rates to clear-cutting in
watersheds. Their legacy is a barren landscape of stumps and muddy,
dying salmon streams.

For more than twenty years the environmental lobby has fought
back. Groups like Greenpeace, the Sierra Club and the Western Canada
Wilderness Committee have issued thousands of press releases detailing
the various harms the forest companies have done. Ecoguides have
taken thousands of visitors to see the ancient virgin forests (making
them aware, in the most personal way, of what's at stake in the woods).
Volunteers have built boardwalks under the forests' cathedrallike
canopies. Over the years, hundreds of passionate protesters have been
arrested for blocking logging roads or chaining themselves to the log-
gers' equipment.

154 Culture Jam

Environmentalists have won many concessions. Tracts of rain for-
est have been spared by government edict. Parks have been created.
Clear-cutting practices have been changed.

Yet the fundamental problems remain. The forest companies are
still cutting above sustainable levels, still trashing the salmon runs, still
leaving a bunch of mismanaged tree farms for future generations to
deal with. And when the protests get too heavy, when the business cli-
mate is no longer conducive, when the lucrative old-growth forests are
gone, the logging companies will move their operations to Indonesia or
Brazil or some other place where the pickings are better.

"How much harm does a company have to do before we question
its right to exist?" asked the author of The Ecology of Commerce, Paul
Hawken. With that question, he reframed the whole corporate debate.
Try it; it's empowering. Instead of contesting the harms one by one,
instead of asking the logging company to stop doing bad things here
and here and here, start questioning their legitimacy, their legal right to
continue conducting business in your state or province.

Reframing an issue so that you, not a corporation, are the sovereign
entity is a little like looking at those Gestalt drawings in psychology
class: Is it a goblet or is it two faces nose to nose? Once the perceptual
shift has occurred and you see the faces, the goblet disappears.

To get an idea of what the shift feels like on an emotional level,
think of your relationship with your father or mother. Recall the many
little scraps you've had over the years. Then think back to that moment
when, in some not-quite-precisely-defined way, the power dynamic
suddenly changed. It probably happened when you were in your mid-
teens. Maybe your father grounded you for a bit too long, or lectured
you a bit too loudly, or otherwise went a bit too far in asserting his
authority. And something inside you snapped. You looked into his eyes
and instead of seeing strength, confidence and certitude, you suddenly
saw insecurity, confusion and fear. For the first time in your life, you
talked back at him, even if that meant storming out of the house and
living somewhere else for a while, even if it meant reducing your mom
to tears, even if it meant raising your fist. In the past all that would have

The Second American Revolution 155

been unthinkable, but the world had suddenly changed. That day, for
the first time, you became your own person and nobody — not even
your father — was going to push you around.

A teenager's declaration of independence is one of the universal
rites of passage. What the world needs now is a similar rite of tri-
umphant passage for citizens in the corporate house.

Fifty years ago, Alabama blacks sat in the backs of buses and at
their own end of the lunch counter without thinking twice about it.
Many women once believed they didn't deserve to vote. When I was a
teenager, women were discouraged from driving a car because, hey,
everyone knew they were terrible drivers. And many women believed it
was true. They smiled and joked about it and let the men do the driving.

Today, we're caught in the same kind of reflexive subservience to
corporations. We think it's normal for them to have more rights than we
do. We think it's proper for them to set the rules of doing business in
our communities. We think it's legitimate for them to clear-cut ancient
forests, influence elections, run our airwaves, take politicians on jaunts
to the Bahamas and draft the world trade rules.

But it isn't, and once you've reframed the issues of sovereignty,
power and privilege, you'll wonder why you ever thought it was.

Now, having completed this workshop and adjusted your personal
mind-set, you may be ready to go to the next level — to actually tinker
with the corporate genetic code.

GROUNDING THE CORPORATION

A corporation has no heart, no soul, no morals. It cannot feel pain. You
cannot argue with it. That's because a corporation is not a living thing,
but a process — an efficient way of generating revenue. It takes energy
from outside (capital, labor, raw materials) and transforms it in various
ways. In order to continue "living" it needs to meet only one condition:
Its income must equal its expenditures over the long term. As long as it
does that, it can exist indefinitely.

When a corporation hurts people or damages the environment, it
will feel no sorrow or remorse because it is intrinsically unable to do so. (It
may sometimes apologize, but that's not remorse — that's public rela-
tions.) Buddhist scholar David Loy, of Tokyo's Bunkyo University, put it
this way: "A corporation cannot laugh or cry; it cannot enjoy the world or
suffer with it. Most of all a corporation cannot love" That's because cor-
porations are legal fictions. Their "bodies" are just judicial constructs, and
that, according to Loy, is why they are so dangerous. "They are essentially
ungrounded to the earth and its creatures, to the pleasures and responsi-
bilities that derive from being manifestations of the earth." Corporations
are in the most literal and chilling sense "dispassionate."

158 Culture Jam

We demonize corporations for their unwavering pursuit of
growth, power and wealth. Yet, let's face it: They are simply carrying out
genetic orders. That's exactly what corporations were designed — by
us — to do. Trying to rehabilitate a corporation, urging it to behave
responsibly, is a fool's game. The only way to change the behavior of a
corporation is to recode it; rewrite its charter; reprogram it.

When a corporation like General Electric, Exxon, Union Carbide
or Philip Morris breaks the law, causes an environmental catastrophe or
otherwise undermines the public interest, the usual result is that . . .
nothing very much happens. The corporation may be forced to pay a
fine, revamp its safety procedures, face a boycott. At worst — and this is
very rare — it is forced into bankruptcy. The shareholders lose money
and the employees lose their jobs. Usually, though, the shareholders
move on to other investments, and company executives find work else-
where. In fact, it's often the public and low-level employees who suffer
the most when a corporation dies.

What if there was another, more serious, potential outcome, one
that would lay responsibility where it belongs? What if each shareholder
was deemed personally responsible and liable for collateral damage to
bystanders or harms to the environment? Why shouldn't it be so? If
you're a shareholder, a part-owner of a corporation, and you reap the
rewards when the going is good, why shouldn't you be held responsible
for that company when it becomes criminally liable?

If we rewrote the rules of incorporation so that every shareholder
assumed partial liability, financial markets would immediately undergo
dramatic change. Fewer shares would be traded. Instead of simply
choosing the biggest cash cows, potential shareholders would carefully
investigate the backgrounds of the companies they were about to sink
their money into. They would think twice about buying shares in Philip
Morris Inc. or R. J. Reynolds or Monsanto. Too risky. They would
choose resource companies with good environmental records. They
would stay away from multinationals that use child workers or break
labor laws overseas. In other words, the shareholders would be
grounded — forced to care and take responsibility. Stock markets would

Grounding the Corporation 159

cease to be gambling casinos. Our whole business culture would heave.

We made an enormous mistake when we let shareholders off the
legal-liability hook. But it's not too late to rectify that mistake. We, the
people, created the corporate charter and the rules for buying stocks
and shares, and now, we the people must change those rules.

The same approach can be extended to corporate crime. When a
human being commits a major crime — gets caught trafficking cocaine
or robbing a store — society metes out harsh justice. The felon automat-
ically loses his political rights (to vote and hold office) and if the crime
is serious enough, he does hard time. When he gets out of jail he's
marked for life. Employers won't hire him. People who know his back-
ground won't trust him. He can't travel freely across borders. In some
parts of America, if he commits three felonies, he's put away for life.

Compare that to the worst that might happen to a corporation
caught flagrantly breaking the law. The public is outraged. The CEO
loses his job. There's a shake-up in the boardroom. The company faces a
class-action suit and pays out a lot of money. But ... at the end of the
day, the executives of a criminal corporation really don't have so much
to worry about. Their chances of ending up in jail are next to zero. And
the corporation itself loses none of its political or legal rights to con-
tinue to do business, lobby Congress or participate in elections. In the
end, the corporation hires a new CEO, settles the suit, launches a PR
campaign to regain public confidence. This is often seen as just the price
of doing business. That's why the executives of rogue corporations like
Philip Morris can keep lying to us, hiding information and otherwise
flouting the law with impunity year after year after year. There is no
penalty they fear.

We must find ways to instill that fear. We must enact tough new
corporate criminal liability laws. Repeat offenders should be barred for
a specified number of years from selling things to the government. They
should be ineligible to hold government contracts and licenses for tele-
vision stations. They should not be allowed to finance political cam-
paigns or lobby Congress, and they should forfeit their legal rights just
as individual criminals do.

160 Culture Jam

We must rewrite the rules of incorporation in such a way that any
company caught repeatedly and willfully dumping toxic wastes; damag-
ing watersheds; violating antipollution laws; harming employees, cus-
tomers, or the people living near its factories; engaging in price fixing;
defrauding its customers; or keeping vital information secret automat-
ically has its charter revoked, its assets sold off and the money funneled
into a superfund for its victims.

There are precedents for this kind of action, though you have to go
back a century to find them. In 1884, the people of New York City, citing
a willful pattern of abuse, asked their attorney general to revoke the
charter of the Standard Oil Trust of New York (they succeeded). The
state of Pennsylvania revoked the charters of a number of banks that
were found to be operating against the public interest. Michigan, Ohio
and New York revoked the charters of oil, sugar and whiskey trusts. In
1890, the highest court in New York State revoked the charter of the
North River Sugar Refining Corporation with these words: "The judg-
ment sought against the defendant is one of corporate death. The state,
which created, asks us to destroy, and the penalty invoked represents the
extreme rigor of the law. The life of a corporation is, indeed, less than
that of the humblest citizen "

Warnings about corporate consolidation have also come out of
more recent court decisions. In 1976, U.S. Supreme Court Justices White,
Brennan and Marshall noted that "the special status of corporations has
placed them in a position to control a vast amount of economic power by
which they may, if not regulated, dominate not only the economy but also
the very heart of our democracy, the electoral process."

Today, after one hundred years of inaction, corporate charters are
once again being challenged.

In May 1998, New York Attorney General Dennis Vacco revoked
the charters of the Council for Tobacco Research and the Tobacco Insti-
tute, on the grounds that they are tobacco-funded fronts that serve "as
propaganda arms of the industry."

In Alabama, the only state in the union where a private citizen can
file a legal petition to dissolve a corporation, Judge William Wynn did

Grounding the Corporation 161
just that. In June 1998, acting as a private citizen (and comparing his
actions to making a citizen's arrest), Wynn named five tobacco compa-
nies that, he asserted, have broken state child-abuse laws and should be
shut down. "The grease has been hot for a year now, and it's time to put
the chicken in," he said.

On September 10, 1998, in what maybe the largest corporate char-
ter revocation effort in a century, thirty individuals and organizations
(including the National Organization for Women, Rainforest Action
Network and National Lawyers Guild) petitioned California Attorney
General Dan Lungren to pull the plug on Unocal Corporation, which,
they claim, engages in environmental devastation, unethical treatment
of workers and gross human-rights violations.

And on Tuesday, November 3, 1998, in the fiercely political univer-
sity town of Areata, California, citizens, in the first ballot initiative of its
kind in U.S. history, voted 3,139 to 2,056 to "ensure democratic control
of all corporations conducting business within the city." Now, in town
hall meetings and an ongoing citywide conversation, the people of
Areata will decide what role they want corporations to play in their
community.

The 1886 Santa Clara County v. Southern Pacific Railroad Supreme
Court decision declared that corporations were "natural persons" under
the U.S. Constitution. Suddenly, corporations "came to life" among us,
and started enjoying the same rights and freedoms as we, the citizens
who created them. One of the ultimate long-term strategies for jam-
mers is to revisit that judgment, have it overturned, and ensure that the
corporate "I" will never again rise up in our society.

It will be a long and vicious battle for the soul of America and the
outcome is far from clear. In the next century, will America evolve
toward a radical democracy or an even more entrenched corporate
state? Will more and more of the world economy be "centrally planned
by global megacorporations"? Will we live and work on Planet Earth, or
Planet Inc.? The only way to avoid this latter, nightmare scenario is for a
few million Americans to start thinking and acting like empowered,
sovereign citizens.

PETITION

To Revoke Philip Morris's Corporate Charter
in the State of New York

Dear Attorney General Eliot L. Spitzer:

We, the undersigned citizens of the United States
and New York, who are sovereign over govern-
ment and corporations, have the responsibility of
keeping both these institutions subservient.
In May of 1998, The Council for Tobacco Research
USA Inc. and The Tobacco Institute Inc. were
placed in receivership as a direct result of a peti-
tion your predecessor Dennis Vacco initiated
against these two groups for serving as "propa-
ganda arms" of tobacco companies.
Now we ask you to initiate similar
proceedings against Philip Morris, Inc.

According to New York State law, you, the attorney
general, may bring an action for the dissolution of
a corporation upon one or more of the following
grounds:

That the corporation has exceeded the author-
ity conferred upon it by law, or has violated any
provision of law whereby it has forfeited its char-
ter, or carried on, conducted, or transacted its
business in a persistently fraudulent or illegal
manner.

For over 25 years Philip Morris, Inc., has trans-
acted its business in a persistently fraudulent
manner and therefore we the undersigned call
upon you to commence proceedings to dissolve
the corporate existence of Philip Morris, Inc.

signature

Please sign, photocopy and return this petition to the Media Foundation, 1243 W. 7th Ave, Vancouver, BC, V6H 1 B7, Canada.
Or fax it to: 604-737-6021. Or find out more and sign the cyberpetition at <www.adbusters.org>

Grounding the Corporation 163

One way to jump-start this "second American revolution" is to
make an example of one of the world's biggest corporate criminals —
Philip Morris Inc. Launch a TV campaign that tells the horrifying truth
about that company's long criminal record. Organize a massive boycott
of its food products, collect a mind-addling number of petition signa-
tures, keep applying the pressure and simply never let up until the attor-
ney general of the state of New York revokes the company's charter.

THE EVOLUTION OF MARKETING

Marketing! selling society on
an ever-expanding horizon of
products and services.

Social Marketings selling society
on a new set of ideas, lifestyles,
philosophies and worldviews.

Hegamarketing: urging society to
consume less electricity,
gasoline, energy, materials.

Demarketing; unselling the consumer
society: turning the incredible
power of marketing against itself.

DEMARKETING LOOPS

Midtown Manhattan, 1999: In the boardroom of a famous lifestyle
magazine, a young editor leans forward, removes his Gauthier glasses
and broaches a Big Idea.

"Two words: 'Demarketing Chic' "

By the expressions of his colleagues, he can tell he's halfway there.
They like it. They may love it.

"Here's the deal," he explains. "The world has gotten just unbeliev-
ably commercial, right? And people are starting to go a little crazy from
it. They've completely bought into it, and it's been a hell of a ride, but
now they're reaching a saturation point. They think maybe they're get-
ting to the end of this business of glitz and hype and Ya Gotta Have It.
So we say, in effect, Yeah. Your instincts are right. For the first time in
forever, marketing isn't cool. Excess isn't cool."

He takes a slug of Pellegrino and continues.

"We do a trend piece — not a think piece but more of a package.
Four or five spreads. Maybe we devote a whole issue to it. We really sell
the idea hard."

"And we do that by ... "

166 Culture Jam

"By rounding up the least commercial people you can think of.
People who stand in opposition to the whole idea of conspicuous con-
sumerism. Anticonsumers. Icons of simplicity. We build the package
around these people. We turn them into stars."

"Right..."

"So, for example, the Quaker on the side of the oatmeal box. We
find the actual Quaker who posed for that picture and we do a Q-and-A
thing."

"The actual Quaker?"

"Well, some actor who we say is the actual Quaker."
"Okay, good. Who else?"
"Sister Wendy."
"The art-critic nun?"

"Yeah. Very, very cool, in her way. We get her to hang out with Cy
Twombly and Julian Schnabel. Just shoot the breeze with these guys. At
Schnabel's place, by the pool."

"More."

"The Dalai Lama — a very funny guy, apparently — headlining on
amateur night at The Comedy Store in L.A."
"More."

"Mother Teresa."
"Too late. More."

"'Those Crafty Amish' on The Learning Channel."
"More."

"Ralph Nader in a Martha Stewart-style shoot at Walden Pond, in
front of Thoreau's cabin."

"Can we find Thoreau's old cabin?"

"Doesn't matter. We'll build another. No one will know."

Demarketing. The whole concept lends itself to satire, possibly because
it seems so foreign to most of us. The word has a sinister ring to it.
Whatever else demarketing is, it's certainly un-American.

Advertising and marketing are so deeply embedded in our culture
now that it's hard to imagine a time when product placement and net-

Demarketing Loops 147

work logo "burns" and "bugs" weren't everywhere you looked, when our
lifestyles and culture weren't predicated on consumption. But that pre-
marketing era was not so long ago: only two generations. Demarketing
is about restoring a little of the sanity we enjoyed back then. It's about
uncooling our consumer culture, reclaiming the real, recovering some
of what has been lost since consumerism became the First World's new
religion.

The other day, in a moment of guy-to-guy candor, a friend chal-
lenged me on my demarketing philosophy and my whole outlook on
life. "Kalle," he said, "you complain about advertising, you complain
about the big, bad media, you bitch about how much we consume and
how we govern ourselves and how corporations are ruining America.
You say you want a radically different way of life — a revolution. But
would you really want to live in the kind of world you're proposing?"

I asked him to be more specific.

"Isn't the live-fast, die-hard lifestyle you can't stand the very thing
that makes it so much fun to be American? Living large is our inheri-
tance. It's what we fought for and won. We have the highest standard of
living in the world because we earned it. We did it by taking risks and
being inventive and working our butts off. So now maybe I want to
drive fast, and rattle the windows with my music, and have sex with my
wife in our backyard swimming pool, and watch Monday Night Football
while burgers grill on the barbecue. And I want to be able to do these
things without having to listen to your sanctimonious objections."

My friend had just returned from New York, which he sees as an
exciting microcosm of America. "Sure it has problems. It's big, it's loud,
it's congested, you can step on a dirty needle in Central Park and the cab
driver may be too scared to take you to Harlem. But I'll bet if you asked
most New Yorkers they'd tell you they wouldn't want to live anywhere
else. If you sanitized New York, it wouldn't be New York. It'd be Balti-
more. And if you sanitized America, it wouldn't be America. It'd be Swe-
den or Canada. Life wouldn't be worth living."

"You just don't get it," I told him. "I'm not trying to sanitize Amer-
ica. The world I'm proposing isn't some watered-down, politically cor-

168 Culture Jam

rect place. It's wilder and more interesting than your world in every way.
It's open TV airwaves where meme wars, not ratings wars, are fought
every day. It's radical democracy — people telling governments and cor-
porations what to do instead of the other way around. It's empowered
citizens deciding for themselves what's 'cool' — not a society of con-
sumer drones suckling at the corporate teat. It's living a life that's con-
nected to the planet, knowing something about it, caring for it and
handing it down to our children in some kind of decent shape.

"What I'm saying is that the American dream isn't working any-
more, so let's face that reality and start building a new one."

I noticed my friend roll his eyes a couple of times as I spoke. In
many ways he is the typical North American — ambitious, competitive,
successful. If he could convince me that he really is happy and alive, I'd
have to concede that his way, though it's not my way, is perfectly valid.
But I just don't see it. The supersize American lifestyle generates at least
a little guilt in every marginally thoughtful person who pursues it.
There's a lot of dirty laundry in my friend's life that he can't ignore, no
matter how far under the bed he shoves it. He sees me as a disgruntled
Lefty pissing on the American parade; I see him as a man in upper-
income-bracket denial, getting what he can while the going is good even
as his world is collapsing around him. Of one thing I am sure: His
hyperconsumptive lifestyle isn't cool anymore. The old American
dream is dying. Change is coming.

One of the great secrets of demarketing the American dream is
detourning it, in the public imagination, with a dream that's even more
seductive. What's better than being rich? Being spontaneous, authentic,
alive.

The new American dream is simply to approach life full-on, with-
out undue fear or crippling self-censorship, pursuing joy and novelty as
if tomorrow you'll be in the ground. The Situationists called this
impulse "the will to playful creation," and they believed it should be
extended "to all known forms of human relationships." There's no one
more alive than the person who is openly, freely improvising — which is
why the best stand-up comics love hecklers, and why the best hosts love

Demarketing Loops 169
wild-card dinner guests, and why the most electric political figures love
deviating from their prepared scripts on live TV. There's no other way to
discover what's at your core. This is what the new American dream is all
about, and this is the kind of person the culture jammer aspires to be:
someone who, to paraphrase Ray Bradbury, "jumps off cliffs and builds
his wings on the way down."

Uncooling Consumption

On the most basic level, demarketing is simply about not buying. An
anticonsumerist lifestyle flat-out repudiates the whole idea of market-
ing. When you don't buy, you don't buy in to consumer culture. When
you don't buy in, corporations lose their hold on you.

One increasingly visible group of people have embraced this idea
as a faith. They have looked hard at the way we do things in this country
and decided it's no longer their way. Somewhere between the time Faith
Popcorn coined the term "cashing out" and the time actor Sherry
Stringfield walked away from the TV show E.R. (to rediscover the true
meaning of life, a.k.a. leisure time and her partner), the downshifting
movement took off. Thousands of Americans now call their lifestyle
"voluntary simplicity" (after Duane Elgin's 1981 book of the same
name). Some of these downshifters left high-powered jobs and took
drastic pay cuts in order to make more time for family, friends, commu-
nity, meaningful work. Others were wage slaves who simply decided to
improve what Vicki Robin and Joe Dominguez, in Your Money or Your
Life, call their "joy-to-stuff ratio." Away with frantic living, they have
declared. Away with the acquisitive, secular culture that causes even the
most sensible souls to drift out of plumb. Too much work, too much
clutter, too much distance between expectation and outcome, between
investment and payoff, between head and heart will spell the end of us.
The downshifters concluded that a higher goal than to amass wealth is
to concentrate on culture as Alexander Solzhenitsyn defined it: "the
development, enrichment and improvement of non-material life." They
understand intuitively what statistics bear out: The aggregate level of

BUY NOTHING DAY

30-SECOND TV SPOT

Voice:

"The average North American
consumes five times more
than a Mexican . , .

... ten times more than a
Chinese person and thirty times
more than a person in India.

We are the most voracious
consumers in the world...
a world that could die
because of the way we
North Americans live.

BUY NOTHING DAY

NOVEMBER 26

no for By the rroda foundation 1-800-6&3-1

Give it a rest.
November ;6 is
Buy Nothing Day."

Demarketing Loops 171

American life fulfillment peaked in 1957, and with a couple of brief
exceptions, it's been downhill from there.

We hear many dramatic downshifting stories: the eight-figure
bond trader who, while getting his shoes shined, picks up a copy of The
Tightwad Gazette or Living Green ("Live simply, that all may simply
live"), has an epiphany, bails out of the modern contest and flees to the
country to farm hogs or write murder mysteries. But this kind of down-
shifter is hardly the norm.

Many downshifters had no choice in the matter; they were canned,
and that proved to be the best thing that ever happened to them. Alice
Kline, whom Juliet Schor describes in The Overspent American, was a
merchandising director for a high-fashion company. When she was
wooed to return to lucrative full-time work after being laid off, Kline
insisted on her own terms: chiefly, a four-day workweek. Priceless to her
was the freedom to pad around dreamily in her slippers on Friday
mornings. Downshifters like Kline cling to the promise of three things:
more time, less stress and more balance. It's a fairly uncapitalistic brew,
and to my knowledge only one advertiser has ever tried to sell it. In a
network TV ad for the Mormon Church some years ago, a little boy
walks tentatively into a board-meeting-in-progress, a tableful of men in
suits. He shuffles over to the fellow at the end of the table, peers up and
says, "Dad, is time really worth money?" The room falls silent. The boy
has his father's attention. "Why yes, Jimmy, it is." Whereupon the kid
plunks his piggy bank down on the table. "Well, I'd like to play ball after
dinner."

Culture jammers are different from all of the downshifters thus far
described. They aren't just trying to get themselves off the consumer
treadmill and make more time for their kids. They dissent because they
have a strong gut feeling that our culture has gone scandalously wrong
and they just can't participate in it anymore. The old American dream
of endless acquisition sickens them; it enervates them. For jammers
downshifting is not simply a way of adjusting our routines; it's adopting
a lifestyle of defiance against a culture run amok, a revolutionary step
toward a fundamental transformation of the American way of life.

172 Culture Jam

In Small Is Beautiful, a key book in the downshifting canon, E. F.
Schumacher sets up an exquisitely sensible template for living. The
point of life, he says, is "to obtain the maximum of well-being with the
minimum of consumption." This idea is so profoundly simple that it
may well become the credo — the cool — of the twenty-first century. It
applies in all areas of culture, from food to cars to fashion. "It would be
the height of folly ... to go in for complicated tailoring when a much
more beautiful effect can be achieved by the skillful draping of uncut
material," Schumacher writes. By this reasoning, it's cooler to ride a bike
than cruise around in an air-conditioned BMW. Or to wear a plain
white T-shirt than, say, a $125 Ashcroft Freddy Couples golf shirt. It's
true, of course. And the truly cool have always known it.

Uncooling Fast Food

Buying and eating food has, like any act of consumption, political and
even moral implications. "Every decision we make about food is a vote
for the kind of world we want to live in," wrote Frances M. Lappe in her
classic little book, Diet for a Small Planet. Every purchase of a can of
Coke or a trucked-in Chilean nectarine initiates a multinational chain
of responses that we simply can't afford to ignore.

Even when we exercise some discretion — watch what we eat when
we can, pay attention to whether we're buying Maxwell House coffee (a
Philip Morris brand) or Nescafe or whole coffee beans from Sumatra —
we can still be duped at the supermarket level. That's because we have
allowed our eating habits to be shaped by transnational agribusiness. In
the heavily concentrated food industry, the likes of Archer Daniels Mid-
land ("supermarket to the world"), Cargill (the world's largest agribusi-
ness) and Philip Morris (one of the world's largest food corporations)
are framing our choices.

Food corporations are formidable opponents because so much of
what they do is invisible. One of the things they do is cut us off from the
source of our food — a concept known as "distancing."

Distancing is a nasty bit of business, but it shouldn't surprise us. As

174 Culture Jam

Brewster Kneen, author of Invisible Giant, puts it, we are "distanced"
from our mother's breast the moment a baby bottle is inserted into our
mouth. "From that moment on, corporate America gets involved,
hawking processed 'junior' foods and baby foods that contain lots of
salt, sugar and chemicals. Thus we become eager consumers of Ken-
tucky Fried Chicken, Doritos, Pizza Hut and Pepsi (all the same com-
pany) later in life." Eventually, we find ourselves participating in the
ultimate act of distancing: eating a genetically altered tomato whose
mother plant does not even exist.

The average pound of food in America travels 1,300 miles before it
reaches a kitchen table. That's inefficient and unsustainable. Demarket-
ing food involves closing the gap between the source and the plate. It
means turning away from fast foods and superstores and embracing
farmers' markets and the family kitchen; away from hothouse tomatoes
and toward your own local supplier, and eventually, perhaps, your own
garden plot. These decisions will change your life, if you have the
appetite for the journey.

The commitment involves cutting, bit by bit, the food megacorpo-
rations out of your life. This is not so different from weaning yourself
off a destructive yet magnetic relationship with another human being.
Every time you change your mind and don't slip into McDonald's for a
quickie, every time you squirt some lemon into a glass of water instead
of popping open a Coke, every time you decide to put that jar of
Maxwell House coffee back on the shelf, you strike the gong of freedom.

When a groundswell of people train themselves to do all of these
things, to demarket on a daily, personal level, we are applying the bot-
tom jaw of the Strategic Pincer. The top jaw of the pincer is a series of
radio and TV campaigns that ridicule the fast/junk-food industry.
Working from both ends — bottom up and top down — the pincer will
transform the way America, and the world, eats.

Junk food is one of the most frequently advertised products on TV;
that makes it a big target. Today, food jammers take on the junk-food
corporations the way antismoking activists locked horns with the
tobacco industry in the '70s. They try to "contaminate" junk food in the

Demarketing Loops 175
public mind. Every time an antijunk-food ad ("Fact: Over 50 percent of
the calories in this Big Mac come from fat") airs, a replicating meme is
planted. Every time an uncommercial appears on TV attacking those
companies, their brands are a little bit uncooled.

Suppose one day a car full of teenage kids drives by the Golden
Arches and everyone wants to stop for a bite. But one kid, inspired by a
TV subvert he saw the night before, makes a crack about the McDon-
ald's employee standing over the 900-degree french-fry cooker, wearing
the funny hat, making minimum wage and saying, "Somebody remind
me again why I'm not selling drugs?" His friends chuckle. And maybe
they all still stop at McDonald's for that meal. But now they're thinking
about McDonald's in a new way. The oppositional meme has been
planted.

In the nutrition wars, change is afoot. People are rethinking their
food and where it comes from. The idea is catching on that each of us
should "have" a personal farmer, the way we now have a doctor, lawyer
or dentist, a single individual we can trust to supply us with healthy,
safe, flavorful produce. So are farmers' markets where regional produc-
ers (and only regional producers) are invited to sell their wares. So are
community "box schemes" where hampers of fresh fruit and vegeta-
bles — whatever 's in season — are delivered direct from local farms to
consumers' doors. Out with Wonder Bread from megamarkets, in with
community-supported agriculture, say the new food seers. Down with
policies that encourage industrial, irradiated, bioengineered food pro-
duction to the detriment of everybody but agribusiness. Up with flavor!
Up with nutrition! Up with local control!

Uncooling Calvin

When fashion and cosmetics advertisers market our very physiog-
nomies as renewable, reinventable commodities, we are dehumanized.
We are used up and discarded. In the semiotics of advertising, we are
"cut." The young woman made to feel insecure about her sexuality stops
behaving authentically. She either comes on like a virago or, conversely,

176 Culture Jam

starts staying home Friday nights to compose sad poetry from her black
heart. Likewise, a young man made to feel insecure about his sexuality
either withdraws or grows angry and aggressive and starts taking what
he wants.

As no other company in the last fifteen years, Calvin Klein has
commodified sex, and in the process brutalized our notions of sexuality
and self- worth. The man at the head is a pioneer. He's credited with cre-
ating the ad strategy of moving fashion ads from magazines to outdoor
billboards and bus cards, and of trumpeting the era of the commercial
nude.

Most people remember his 1995 campaign in which young models
were crudely filmed in cheesy wood-paneled basements as an adult
voice called instructions from the wings. The ads reeked of chicken-
hawk porn. Advertising Age's Bob Garfield called it "the most pro-
foundly disturbing campaign in TV history." The spots so offended
public sensibility that they prompted an investigation by the U.S. Justice
Department to determine if the models were underage or child-porn
laws were violated.

When I saw those ads I felt an animal rage stirring inside me. This
was an affront much worse than simple Skinner-box behaviorism.
Calvin wasn't just trying to program young people's choice of jeans, he
was down in the subbasement of consciousness, where the very rudi-
ments of identity are formed.

I could imagine Mr. Klein rubbing his hands with glee. Here he was
exploiting one of our final taboos and milking the controversy he cre-
ated for all it was worth. From a marketing perspective, he was in a win-
win situation and the more controversy the better.

Imagine, for a moment, that the logo cK were the man, Calvin
Klein. Would we feel any differently about the way he goes about his
business? Calvin Klein is very interested in your teenage daughter. You
see him flirting with her. He propositions her. He unzips her pants. He
touches her. He sleeps with her. Finally, he prostitutes her. He degrades
her sexuality for his profit and then, when she has paid out — literally
and figuratively — he dumps her.

OBSESSION FETISH

A collage of cooU sexy,
eerily familiar fashion
images, complete with
hip music and quick
jump cuts.

Close-up on model.
Voice; "Why do nine out of
ten women feel dissatisfied
with some aspect of their
own bodies?"

The model vomits into the toilet.

Voice: "The beauty induslrv
is the beast."

178 Culture Jam

If you discovered someone had done this to your daughter, you'd
probably call up a couple of your big-armed friends and pay the
sonofabitch a visit. Yet what's the difference, in the end, between the cK
ads and imagery exploiting her and Calvin doing it himself? Psychically
speaking, a hole is still a hole, whether it was made with an auger or a
billion drops of water.

The first stage of demarketing our bodies involves realizing the
true source of our self-esteem problems. It's important to understand
that we ourselves are not to blame. Body-image distortions, eating dis-
orders, dieting and exercise addictions — these are intensely personal
issues, fought with therapy and lonely sessions of clandestine vomiting
after dinner. They're our responsibility, but they are not our fault. The
issue is primarily a cultural and a corporate one, and that's the level on
which it must be tackled. We must learn to direct our anger, not
inwardly at ourselves, but outwardly at the beauty industry.

Can the almighty fashion industry be uncooled? In some ways, its
dependence on fads and trends makes it exceptionally vulnerable. Tar-
geting one company — one man — is a good beginning. Cutting signifi-
cantly into Calvin Klein's sales will effectively launch the crusade to take
back our bodies. Uncooling Calvin will send a shock wave through the
whole industry; it will rattle the cosmetics companies, which now
account for the largest individual product group (with the highest
markups) in most big department stores; and it will affect women's
magazines, which have generated enormous profits by convincing
women they are sexual machines. It will send a powerful message that
the pageant is over, and that from now on beauty will no longer be
defined by the likes of Mr. Klein — or any other Mister.

The jammer's best strategy is to plant antifashion memes on popu-
lar TV shows such as CNN's Style with Elsa Klensch and its Canadian
knockoff, Fashion File. I hear fear in network executives' voices every
time I try to buy airtime for our "Obsession Fetish" campaign on the big
three networks or CNN. These executives practically do contortions
trying to explain why they won't sell us the airtime; they know that
Calvin Klein and indeed the whole fashion industry would significantly

Demarketing Loops 179

cut back their TV advertising budgets as soon as our campaign started.
The fashion industry is already held in disdain by many. The only thing
that keeps its bubble aloft is this uncontested billion-dollar presence in
women's magazines and on the airwaves. When we win the legal right to
buy airtime and challenge the industry on TV, that bubble will burst.
And then it will be Calvin's and the industry's turn to feel insecure.

Uncooling the Car

Jammers are now targeting automobiles as the next pariah industry. We
want to sever the intimate connection between people and their cars,
just as we cut the intimate connection between people and cigarettes.
We want auto executives to feel just as squeezed and beleaguered as
tobacco executives. We want them to have a hard time looking their kids
in the eye and explaining exactly what they do for a living.

Resistance to private cars is already building. In San Francisco
thousands of bicyclists roll out of the Embarcadero district, snarling
traffic; a few hold up a giant effigy of Willie Brown, the mayor who
labeled cyclists "terrorists." In Portland, Oregon, the city council experi-
ments with an Amsterdam-style system of free commuter bicycles,
which can be borrowed and returned at various points downtown. In
Canada, jammers air anticar ads, breaking the automobile industry's
uncontested, uninterrupted fifty-year run on TV.

Across the First World, pressure mounts for more bike lanes on
urban streets. Several high-profile architects and planners weigh in with
striking visions of the ecofriendly cities of the next era. Some big oil
corporations, British Petroleum among them, finally accept some
responsibility for global warming and pledge to sink money into
research to develop cleaner petroleum products. Around the world a
half dozen companies compete to produce commercially viable fuel
cells that will power cars at highway speeds with fewer harmful by-
products. Seth Dunn of the WorldWatch Institute likens what's happen-
ing now to a full-circle return, one century later, to "engineless
carriages."

180 Culture Jam

On a strategic level, however, much work remains to be done.

More than any other product, the car stands as a symbol of the
need for a true-cost marketplace, wherein the price you pay for a car
reflects all the costs of production and operation. That doesn't just
mean paying the manufacturing cost plus markup, plus oil, gas and
insurance. It means paying for the pollution, for building and maintain-
ing the roads, for the medical costs of accidents and the noise and the
aesthetic degradation caused by urban sprawl. It means paying for traf-
fic policing and for military protection of oil fields and supply lines.

The true cost of a car must also include the real but hard-to-
estimate environmental cost to future generations of dealing with the
oil- and ozone-depletion and climate-change problems the car is creat-
ing today. If we added up the best available estimates, we'd come to a
startling conclusion: The fossil fuel-based automobile industry is being
subsidized by unborn generations to the tune of hundreds of billions of
dollars every year. Why should they have to pay to clean up our mess?

In the true-cost marketplace of the future, no one will prevent you
from driving. You will simply have to pay the real cost of piloting your
ton of metal, spewing a ton of carbon out of the tailpipe every year.
Your private automobile will cost you, by some estimates, around
$100,000. And a tankful of gas, $250.

Moving gradually over a ten-year period toward true- cost driving
(giving the global automakers clear signals for long-term planning)
would force us to reinvent the way we get around. When the majority of
people can no longer afford to drive, enormous public demand for
monorails, bullet trains, subways and streetcars would emerge.
Automakers would design ecofriendly alternatives: vehicles that recycle
their own energy, human- and fuel-powered hybrids, lightweight solar
vehicles. Citizens would demand more bike lanes, pedestrian paths and
car-free downtowns. And a paradigm shift in urban planning would
ensue.

About five or so years into the transition period, personal automo-
biles would become more trouble than they're worth. People would
start enjoying their calmer lifestyles and the new psychogeography of

Demarketing Loops 181
their cities. The rich car owner still cruising through town belching car-
bon would become the object of scorn and mockery.

In many ways the true-cost marketplace is the ultimate, all-
purpose demarketing device. Every purchase becomes a demarketing
loop. Every transaction penalizes the "bad" products and rewards the
"good." Jammers envision a global, true-cost marketplace in which the
price of every product tells the ecological truth. The price of a pack of
cigarettes would include the extra burden it places on the health care
system; the price of an avocado would reflect the real cost of flying it
over thousands of miles to your supermarket; the cost of nuclear energy
(if indeed we can afford it) would include the estimated cost of storing
the radioactive waste in the Earth's crust for up to tens of millions of
years.

True cost is a simple but potent way to redesign the global econ-
omy's basic incentives in a relatively uncharged political atmosphere.
Conservatives like the idea because it's a logical extension of their free-
market philosophy. Progressives like it because it involves a radical
restructuring of the status quo. Governments like it because it gives
them a vital new function to fulfill: that of calculating the true costs of
products, levying ecotaxes and managing our bioeconomic affairs for
the long term. And environmentalists like it because it may be the only
way to achieve sustainability in our lifetimes.

Uncooling the Spectacle

Demarketing and the true-cost economy are the metamemes that bring
the culture jammers' revolution together. It all sounds pretty ambitious,
but the first steps are straightforward. Using a methodical, systematic
social marketing campaign, we start at the personal level and grow in
scope. We begin by demarketing our bodies, our minds, our children.
Then we join with like-minded jammers to demarket whole systems.
We go after our chief social and cultural rituals, now warped beyond
recognition by commercial forces, and try to restore their original
authenticity. Mother's Day, Easter, Halloween, Thanksgiving, Christ-

Nothing

What you've been looking for

Demarketing Loops 183

mas: All are ripe for demarketing. All can be reclaimed.

Students insist on ad-free learning environments. Voters demand
that election advertising be replaced with televised town hall-type
meetings in which the candidates face the electorate directly. Athletes
refuse to endorse unethical companies. Fans insist that stadiums be
named after their heroes, not corporations. Reporters make sure that
advertorials are not part of their job descriptions. Artists, writers and
filmmakers work on product marketing as well as social marketing
campaigns. Families get food from their gardens and "therapy" from
each other, from friends, neighbors and community.

We reverse the spin cycle. We demarket our news, our entertain-
ments, our lifestyles and desires — and, eventually, maybe even our
dreams.

TV RATE CARD

Typical rates for a 30-second timeslot:

Super Bowl (national) $1,500,000

CBS Evening News (national) $55,000

MTV (national) $4,100

CNN Headline News (national) $3,000

Late evening news (local) $750

Saturday morning cartoons (local) $450

Late night movies (local) $100

Call your local stations for exact rates.

MEDIA CARTA

Freedom has always been Western civilization's most powerful
metameme. The idea of a free citizenry was born with the ancient Greek
notion of "democracy" and has continued to evolve ever since. The
English Magna Carta gave it weight and permanence. When the meme
spread to the New World, it inspired the end of slavery; later, it led to
universal suffrage and the dream of equality among all people.

The march of freedom has been humankind's gradual awakening.
We have come to accept the simple truth that oppression does not have
to stand. We live under no one's thumb. In every way we control our
own destiny.

At the heart of freedom lies the freedom to talk to one another — to
communicate. That, too, is as old as the ancient Greeks, who recognized
the right of citizens to express their opinions. When the world's first
mass medium — the printing press — was introduced, it became clear
that "freedom of opinion" was not enough to guarantee free speech
(many "Gutenberg revolutionaries" were censored and repressed when
they tried to express their opinions about kings and popes). So the
higher notion of freedom of expression was born.

186 Culture Jam

Article XI of the 1789 French Declaration of the Rights of Man
and of the Citizen asserts that "the free communication of ideas and
opinions is one of the most precious rights of man." Since then the
principle of freedom of information has been enshrined in all the
universal and regional declarations and conventions relating to
human rights.

Article 13 of the 1979 American Convention on Human Rights
reads, in part: "The right of expression may not be restricted by indirect
methods or means, such as the abuse of government or private controls
over newsprint, radio broadcasting, . . . or any other means tending to
impede the communication and circulation of ideas and opinions"

On December 10, 1948, freedom of information was enshrined in
the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, whose article 19 is the
most categorical expression thereof: "Everyone has the right . . . to free-
dom of opinion and expression; this right includes freedom . . . to seek,
receive and impart information and ideas through any media and regard-
less of frontiers"

Half a century after the signing of the Universal Declaration of
Human Rights, citizens have access to a mind-numbing amount of
information. Hundreds of newspapers and magazines are at our finger-
tips. The five-hundred-channel universe has turned out to be a conser-
vative guess. CNN beams news live around the world twenty-four hours
a day. Cyberspace expands exponentially from the Big Bang of the digi-
tal revolution. It would be easy to conclude, in this climate, that the long
struggle for freedom of opinion, expression and speech is finally over.

But it's not.

In the past twenty years, an unprecedented situation has devel-
oped with grave implications for democracy and freedom of speech:
the emergence of a global communications cartel. The flow of infor-
mation worldwide is controlled by an ever-shrinking number of
transnational media corporations led by a handful of giants — Tele-
Communications Inc. (T.C.I. ), Time Warner, Disney, Bertelsmann,
General Electric, Viacom and Rupert Murdoch's News Corporation.
The great power of these organizations lies in their vertical integra-

Media Carta 187
tion. They can produce a film and distribute it through their own par-
tially or fully owned theater chain, promote it through their own TV
networks, play the soundtrack on their own radio stations and sell the
merchandising spinoffs at their own amusement parks. A property
can enter this vertical chain at any point and be spun in either direc-
tion. A film becomes a book, a hit single, then a TV show, a video
game, a ride. Among them, the media giants have the means to pro-
duce a never-ending flow of social spectacles, and to nurture them,
feed them, massage them and keep them resonating in the public
mind. With the exception of a few wild domains still left here and
there (public-access TV, pirate radio, zines, some unexplored reaches
of cyberspace), the media megacorps have pretty well colonized the
whole global mindscape and "developed" it into a theme park — a jolly,
terrifyingly homogenized Las Vegas of the mind.

What does freedom of speech mean in this kind of mental environ-
ment?

What can you as an individual do if you don't like an ad campaign,
the violence on TV, the way your local TV station covers the news, or
the way a corporation or the government is manipulating the public
agenda? Well . . . you can send a letter to the editor of your local news-
paper, call in to a radio talk show or take your complaint to an advertis-
ing industry association like the American Association of Advertising
Agencies (AAAA) or the Canadian Advertising Association (CAA). You
can phone a TV station or vent your spleen to the media watchdogs, the
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio-
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). If you're really angry (and
somewhat organized), you can attend FCC hearings and try to revoke a
TV license. Or you can become a media producer, write your own script
and try to break into the information chain with your own documen-
tary. If you're rich, you can bankroll your own films and documentaries.
If you're very rich, you can buy a TV station. If you're filthy rich, you
can amass a media empire. Each stage of participation takes you higher
on what I call the "ladder of truth." Only a very few people ever get
beyond the bottom rungs.

188 Culture Jam

On the lower rungs, our democracy seems to work quite well.
Newspapers print lots of letters to the editor, radio talk shows debate
the hot issues of the day, media and advertising watchdogs deal with
hundreds of complaints every year. But how do you climb the ladder of
truth and get your voice heard in the higher echelons of public dis-
course?

David Grossman has thought a lot about this. A former U.S. Army
officer and the author of the Pulitzer Prize-nominated On Killing: The
Psychological Cost of Learning to Kill in War and Society, he has made a
personal crusade of spreading the word on the incontrovertible link
between TV violence and real-world crime. More than two hundred
studies have identified a clear cause-and-effect relationship, and every
credible agency from the American Medical Association to the Surgeon
General's Office to the United Nations has accepted the conclusion. Yet
this news has somehow escaped most American parents. If they realized
the impact of TV violence on their kids, they would hardly be so cava-
lier about their kids' viewing habits (or for that matter their own),
Grossman suspects.

These people cannot be warned effectively, because the most pow-
erful and far-reaching delivery system for the message won't broadcast
it. Even though Grossman has been contacted many times by apparently
enthusiastic television producers, no story on him or the TV-crime link
has ever aired on network TV (with one exception, when CNBC gave
him the hook after twenty seconds). "Every time the story gets to a
higher level, it's killed," he says plainly. Grossman happens to live in
Jonesboro, Arkansas, where a local student recently went on a school-
yard shooting rampage. As an expert on the psychology of assassina-
tion, Grossman was besieged by the media, did many international
radio and newspaper interviews, and was contacted by more than a
dozen network TV producers. But his TV spots never ran. "Without fail,
remorse or hesitation, when the networks found out where I was com-
ing from (that is, ready to implicate TV as a probable culprit in the
tragedy), they'd have nothing to do with me," Grossman says. "The
magnitude of the stonewalling is staggering."

Media Carta 189

What to do then? How do you get the message out when you
have no access to the messenger? Grossman's long-term strategy
involves three points of attack: education, legislation and litigation.
Educate by every other means but TV "until there's a groundswell of
outrage," until the conspicuous absence of TV coverage of an enor-
mous national story becomes the obvious story in itself. Legislate
change by lobbying for major amendments to broadcast regulations,
or the wholesale replacement of the FCC. Institute class-action suits
for damages against the industry, much like the ones that have been
brought against the tobacco industry. "The broadcasters may be
powerful enough to buy candidates and influence elections, but they
can't buy every jury of twelve people in the U.S. When a jury sees the
unassailable evidence, we've won." Grossman imagines a group of
people who have already been victimized in a high-profile incident
like the one in Jonesboro banding together and launching an action
that simply cannot be ignored. "Parents of the shooter and the
parents of the victims have to both agree that one of the criminals
here is the TV networks. And then we hold the networks' feet to the
fire."

Grossman is proof that a committed individual can climb the lad-
der of truth, but his dilemma points to a disturbing lack of democracy
at the heart of our mass media. Nor is TV violence the only subject too
taboo for the networks to touch. Think of TV addiction, arguably
North America's number one mental health problem. Or unsustainable
overconsumption by the affluent people of the First World. When is the
last time you saw a network show (or a citizen-produced advocacy ad)
on these subjects?

Here's the point: The ideas, expressions and concerns of individual
citizens no longer matter very much. Culture isn't created from the bot-
tom up by the people anymore — it's fed to us top-down by corpora-
tions. Under current conditions, real debate is impossible. Real democracy
is impossible. Real change is impossible.

Media Carta is a media reform movement to take back the cultural
power to which all citizens are entitled — to reclaim our airwaves and

190 Culture Jam

the rest of our mental environment so that we can start telling our own
stories and learn how to talk to each other again.

Occasionally, we get a glimpse of how this new paradigm might
work. In December 1996, the worst snowstorm in a century hit the
Pacific Northwest. In Victoria, British Columbia, home to Canada's
mildest climate (think Seattle with half the rain), five feet of snow fell. A
dead calm settled over the paralyzed city. Victoria was about as prepared
for this as Troy was for the Greeks. The city had only a couple of snow-
plows. For days, no cars moved. People were trapped in their houses.
Virtually no stores were open because the employees couldn't get to
work. The brave ventured out, pulling supplies on sleds. A city of
300,000 was essentially plunged back to pre-Industrial Revolution days.

I mention this because a fascinating media story grew out of that
storm. What happened at a local radio station called CFAX emerged as
an example of the potential use (and long-forgotten past use) of public
airwaves as a democratic medium.

A couple of CFAX employees who had been marooned in the
building by the snow decided to open up a kind of jungle telegraph of
emergency information. Any citizens who could trudge to the station
were put on the air, to tell the city what they had seen out there: some-
one needed help in saving a greenhouse on the Island Highway. An old
couple was stranded and in trouble on Pandora Avenue. A family har-
boring two dozen refugee motorists in Fernwood was running out of
food.

Soon everyone knew that CFAX (and, to a lesser extent, the Inter-
net) was the source of breaking news, delivered by individual sets of
eyes and ears. Every newscast contained information valuable to some-
one. Every broadcast, in the widest possible sense, served the public
interest.

It struck many Victorians that this was the way the world was
supposed to work. The private voices that came over the Victoria air-
waves may not have been broadcasting-school smooth, but they rang
with the clarity of the real. They weren't flacking some story that com-
mercial interests wanted to propagate. They had something to tell and

Media Carta 191

nothing to sell. The citizens responded. Isolated individuals suddenly
felt part of the larger chain; in the Buddhist sense, everyone became
enlightened.

The CFAX case is obviously a unique one — you couldn't repeat it,
wouldn't want to repeat it, on a national scale. But it does contain the
essence of what we're trying to reclaim here. Victorians never felt
more part of a community than they did during that storm, when, for
a brief time, the media fulfilled a social agenda and everyone's two
cents were welcome and equal. I wonder how many of those people,
when the snow had melted and their lives had returned to normal and
the commercial pap was back on the air, looked at radio — or media in
general — differently. I wonder if any of them thought, This is the way
our mass media could be if they had taken a different evolutionary
fork in the road.

I told the CFAX tale to a friend of mine who plays devil's advocate
to many of my ideas. "So what's your point?" he asked.

"My point is, there needs to be a way to get people talking to each
other on radio and TV without commercial mediation."

"There is," he said. "It's called public radio. And public television."
He looked into the middle distance. "I can see it now. Kalle's World: all
public broadcasting all the time. Commercialism has been weaned from
the airwaves. And all these public stations are funded by ever-so-
conscientious private listeners and viewers with nothing better to do
with their time or money than phone in pledges. Remind me to come
over to your place sometime and we'll catch what's on the tube: First
we'll watch the puppet show and then we'll watch the half-hour docu-
mentary on mulch."

"Congratulations," I replied. "You've managed to completely miss
the point. Look, this isn't about enforcing a diet of PBS. It's about open-
ing TV up and letting the commercial memes duke it out with the non-
commercial memes until a new balance is reached. I don't want
commercialism to be completely purged from broadcasting. But it can't
be the one and only voice."

What happens when the commercial voice monopolizes the infor-

192 Culture Jam

mation delivery systems for years and years? We get used to it. That
voice becomes the norm. We cease questioning it. Indeed, we have a
hard time even imagining other voices.

When President Clinton made a diplomatic trip to China in June
1998, high-level politicians held a debate to determine whether to allow
him to address human-rights issues or to debate President Jiang Zemin
live on national TV. Eventually, it was decided that Clinton could have
TV access if he agreed, among other things, not to meet later with dissi-
dents in Hong Kong.

Most North Americans find this kind of thing fairly astonishing.
That TV access by the world's most powerful leader would need the
host government's approval seems ludicrous. That, however, is (as of
this writing, at least) the Chinese way. Of course, if China were to scrap
its state-controlled media, and citizen-owned media were to be installed
in its place, the country would be instantly transformed. Chinese cul-
ture would heave.

American broadcasting isn't an Orwellian state-controlled system.
It's a commercial, corporate-controlled system, but that control can be,
in its own Huxleyan way, just as undemocratic and uncompromising as
the Chinese system. If Americans suddenly decided to break up the
media monopolies with powerful antitrust legislation; or to reserve a
few minutes of every TV broadcast hour for public-generated advocacy
messages; or to deploy some other participatory strategy that gives indi-
viduals and groups a voice on the public airwaves, American culture
would heave, too.

On the surface, the battle for Media Carta — the struggle for who
will control the production and distribution of information in the
twenty-first century — looks like a very unfair fight. On one side
stand the mighty media megacorporations, the government regula-
tors, and a half-century tradition of managing the airwaves as a com-
mercial enterprise. On the other side stands a motley collection of
writers, artists, academics, politicized communications professors
and high school media-literacy teachers, and a loose global network
of NGOs and media and environmental activists. Nevertheless, the

Media Carta 193

underdog has some effective tactical tools at its disposal. On several
fronts there are "leverage points," and if we commit to working them
simultaneously, they will bring results. Here are some of those lever-
age points:

• TV Turnoff Week. A social ritual every April where citizens reclaim
a little time and tranquillity by staying away from the set for one
week. The short-term goal is to get enough abstainers on board to
depress the Nielsen ratings for that week — a powerful gesture of
consumer sovereignty. The broader goal is simply to improve the
quality of people's lives.

• The Two-Minute Media Revolution. As citizen-produced advocacy
uncommercials challenge the status quo on TV, a cyberpetition
gathers signatures. The petition demands that the broadcast indus-
try's governing bodies (in the U.S., the FCC; in Canada, the
CRTC), when granting broadcast licenses, give two minutes out of
every broadcast hour back to the people (advocacy messages would
be chosen on a first-come first-served basis from among those who
wish to speak). If enough people sign the petition, this strategy will
open a hairline crack in the media monopoly.

• Antitrust Lawsuits. The U.S. attorney general's 1998 suit against
Microsoft is a good example of how potent a tool antitrust legisla-
tion can be. If enough fed-up citizens demanded a freer, more
diverse cultural environment, the government could be pressured
to go after Time Warner, News Corporation and Disney, and limit
the number of TV stations, newspapers and radio stations each is
allowed to own.

• The Revocation of Television Licenses. Thirty years ago, local residents
in Boston filed a petition to the FCC to protest the shoddy nightly
news broadcasts of their local station. They wanted WHDH-TV to
have its license revoked — and they succeeded. WHDH faded to black
and a new station under new management was born.

No one since has repeated the Bostonians' success. These days
it's almost impossible to unplug trashy TV stations: Licenses only

Culture Jam

come up for renewal every eight years, the dates aren't advertised
and for decades now, whenever a case does come before them,
both the FCC and CRTC always come down in favor of the
broadcasters.

None of this has deterred Paul Klite, the executive director of
the Denver-based Rocky Mountain Media Watch.

Like many others, Klite believes a lot of network program-
ming is unnecessarily, destructively violent, so he put Denver-
area newscasts through a sophisticated content analysis he called
the "mayhem test." What he found is no surprise: excessive cov-
erage of murders, terrorism, war and disaster. One station's
evening news was 47 percent "mayhem." With this data and citi-
zens' petitions in hand, Klite's group lobbied the FCC to deny
the renewals of the broadcast licenses of four local stations. Klite
argued that Denver TV news is "harming the citizens of Col-
orado," and that they deserve some protection from such pro-
gramming.

Klite struck out. In the FCC's view, TV news is protected by the
First Amendment, and the networks are free to air whatever news
they please.

Despite this setback, Klite's work has pumped new blood into
media activism and created an example that other media watch-
dogs can follow. His work points to a whole new attitude of per-
sonal propriety toward the public airwaves, and reminds us that
they belong to us, not the networks. Most important, he reminds
us that we need regulators at the FCC and the CRTC to stop cozy-
ing up to broadcasters and start taking some courageous and inde-
pendent stances in the public interest.

Legal Action. In 1995, Adbusters Media Foundation launched a
Canadian Charter legal action against the Canadian Broadcasting
Corporation (CBC) for refusing to sell us airtime for our citizen-
produced advocacy messages. The case wound its way through the
courts until the Supreme Court of Canada threw it out in 1998.
The highest court in the land refused to hear it as a constitutional,

PETITION

The Two-Minute Media Revolution

Dear Chairpersons Kennard (FCC) and Bertrand (CRTC),

We the people want access! It is our unwavering conviction that
the public interest will best be served if the television licences
you grant contain the two-minute media provision. We want
broadcasters to set aside two minutes of airtime every hour of
every day for citizen-produced messages in exchange for a
renewed lease on the public airwaves.

We, the undersigned, put it to you, regulators of our airwaves, to
set up a system of direct public access to the most powerful
social communications medium of our time, or to let us know why
you are unable to do so in a free and democratic society.

name address signature

Please sign, photocopy and return this petition to the Media Foundation, 1243 W. 7th Ave. Vancouver, BC, V6H 1B7, Canada.
Or fax it to: 604-737-6021 . Or find out more and sign the cyberpetition at <www.adbusters.org>

Culture Jam

freedom-of-speech issue. The Media Foundation will now take its
case to the World Court in The Hague, under Article 19 of the Uni-
versal Declaration of Human Rights.

In the U.S., the Media Foundation has been trying since 1993 to
launch a First Amendment legal action against NBC, CBS and ABC
for routinely refusing to sell us airtime for any of the twenty-odd
messages we have tried to air since 1991. We have files full of letters
from the networks, plus transcripts of phone conversations with
network executives, which prove that not just single thirty-second
spots, but whole classes of information about transportation, nutri-
tion, fashion and sustainable consumption are systematically being
kept off the public airwaves simply because they threaten big-money
sponsors.

A First Amendment victory in the U.S. Supreme Court would
immediately transform television as we know it today. It would set
up a new level playing field between citizens and corporations, and
give people and groups a powerful new platform to speak out on
the issues that concern them. TV would no longer just transmit
commercial propaganda to a passive population but, instead,
would become a key site of struggle over the production of mean-
ing. Bit by bit the emptiness of our spectacular culture would be
revealed and our currently enforced menu of packaged fun,
beauty, heroes and myths would fade. A vibrant new media culture
would be born.

Given what's at stake here, you'd think there would be dozens of
crusading lawyers eager to sink their teeth into this crucial, high-
profile freedom-of-speech case. Unfortunately, that's not so.

Recently, I placed a call to one of America's most powerful liti-
gators, a specialist in First Amendment issues. I explained our posi-
tion. When citizens cannot walk into their local TV station and buy
airtime, then surely their First Amendment rights are being vio-
lated. Aren't they?

His reaction was immediate and almost visceral. He was a fierce
defender of the First Amendment, true, but chiefly with respect to

Media Carta 197

how it applies to broadcasters. He seemed to hold their right to free
choice above all others.

"In America, I don't think you can compel a publisher or
broadcaster to carry a particular message," he said.

"But if a network decides that Nike or McDonald's can buy
thirty seconds of airtime and say, 'Buy hamburgers' or 'Buy shoes,'
why don't I have the right to buy airtime for my side of the story?"

"You do have your rights, but you can't diminish their rights in
order to enforce yours."

I told him I thought my right to speak out on TV was fairly basic,
given that these are public airwaves that legally belong to everyone.

"I think that's a fiction," he said. "The air may belong to you,
but not the studios and broadcasting facilities of ABC."

I placed a call to another lawyer, this time a high-profile Los
Angeles media attorney and former president of the Beverly Hills
Bar Association, who turned out to be equally circumspect.

"Networks have the right to quality control," he said. "They
have a right to say, 'We won't carry a message that would be offen-
sive to the other sponsors, because we don't want to lose those
sponsors.'"

That's the way it all boils down: The broadcaster's right to run a
commercial business stands in direct opposition to my right to
freedom of speech. I was looking for an advocate who believed that
my cause — the cause of the people — had at least equal merit. The
Beverly Hills attorney gave me the number of another lawyer to try,
and he cordially hung up. The hunt for the First Amendment grail
continues.

Only the vigilant can maintain their liberties, and only those
who are constantly and intelligently on the spot can hope to
govern themselves effectively by democratic procedures. A soci-
ety, most of whose members spend a great deal of their time not
on the spot, not here and now in the calculable future, but
somewhere else, in the irrelevant other worlds of sport and soap

198 Culture Jam

opera, of mythology and metaphysical fantasy, will find it hard
to resist the encroachments of those who would manipulate
and control it.

Aldous Huxley was on the mark in the foreword of his revised 1946
edition of Brave New World, which perhaps more than any other work
of twentieth-century fiction predicted the psychological climate of our
wired age. One can draw an easy parallel between "soma" — the pleasure
drug issued to citizens of Brave New World — and the mass media as we
know them today. Both keep the masses tranquilized and pacified, and
maintain the social order. Both chase out reason in favor of entertain-
ments and disjointed thought. Both encourage uniformity of behavior.
Both devalue the past in favor of sensory pleasures now.

Unlike the people in Orwell's 1984, who resent being controlled by
Big Brother but feel powerless to resist, residents of Huxley's realm will-
ingly participate in their manipulation. They happily take soma. They're
in the loop, and, by God, they love it. The pursuit of happiness becomes
its own end — there's endless consumption, free sex and perfect mood
management. The people are enraptured. They believe they live in
Utopia. Only you, the reader (and a couple of "imperfect" characters in
the book who somehow ended up with real personalities) know it's
Dystopia. It's a hell that can only be recognized by those outside the sys-
tem.

Our own dystopia, too, can only be detected from the outside — by
"outsiders" who for some strange reason did not watch too much TV
when they were young; who read a few good books, met a few good
people, spent some time living in other cultures, and by some lucky
twist of fate were not seduced by The Dream and recruited into the con-
sumer cult of the insatiables.

Although most of us are still stuck in the cult, our taste for soma is
souring. Through the haze of manufactured happiness, we are realizing
that we must stop the show, that our only escape is to halt the flow of
soma, to break the communication cartel's monopoly on the produc-
tion of meaning.

Media Carta 199

Media Carta is the great human-rights battle of our information
age — a great personal, intellectual, social, cultural and legal test. The
infrastructure for this battle is already in place. Culture jammers
around the world are preparing for the showdown. In the early years of
the new millennium, we will spearhead a media reform movement to
enshrine the right to communicate as a fundamental human right in
the constitutions of all free nations and in the Universal Declaration of
Human Rights.

We will save the most precious of all our natural resources: the
peace and clarity of our own minds.

REDEFINING PROGRESS

Fifteen hundred eminent scientists, including the majority of all living
Nobel Prizewinners, signed a Warning to Humanity in 1992, and fifty-
eight world academies of science released a similar document in 1994,
warning that the human experiment on Planet Earth is veering out of
control. Population growth, overconsumption, inappropriate techno-
logical applications and relentless economic expansion are destroying
the life-support systems on which our future depends.

Meanwhile, strangely, our politicians, economists and business
leaders are wearing banana grins. "We're growing," they beam. "We're
putting up more factories, selling more goods, creating more wealth
than ever before in the history of mankind."

Never-ending material growth is the cornerstone of our current
economic system. There's no such thing as a zero-growth model within
its framework. In fact, nothing much but material growth really mat-
ters, economists have decreed.

And yet, constant growth within finite terrain is the ideology of the
cancer cell. It's madness. It's a madness propagated twenty-four hours a
day by the corporate-controlled mass media, which are structurally

202 Culture Jam

incapable of offering us the root-cause analyses of our current predica-
ment.

So we're stuck trying to reconcile powerful mixed messages. For
most of us the economy remains a mysterious abstract system. As with
our microwave oven, we don't know how it works and we don't really
want to know. We just keep pushing buttons and hot dinners keep com-
ing out. We think of markets having their own laws that we break at our
peril. And we think that economists are learned scientists who, with
their arcane but irrefutable logic, are somehow managing the whole
affair.

The truth is that we have handed our ecological and economic
well-being over to an elite group of professional policymakers who
have, at best, only a vague idea of what they are doing. Their "scientifi-
cally" managed cycles of "growth" and consumption are wiping out the
natural world, though if you put it to them that way, they would deny it.
Their idea of "progress" is to sell off the planet's irreplaceable natural
capital and call it income — though they would deny that too.

Is there a way out of this social trap — this crisis of meaning? The
economics profession won't admit its models are flawed. First World
consumers remain blissfully unaware of the havoc wrought by their
lifestyles. The commercial broadcast media won't sell airtime for
citizen-produced wake-up calls. Governments refuse to acknowledge
the astronomical ecological debt we have already accrued to future gen-
erations. Most everyone is in denial. Deep down, we all "know" the
planet is dying, but nobody wants to talk about it.

Of course there are ways to get the conversation going — strategies
for jamming the global economy back onto a sustainable path.

First, we kill all the economists (figuratively speaking). We prove
that despite the almost religious deference society extends to them, they
aren't untouchable. We challenge their authority, question their creden-
tials. We launch a global media campaign to discredit them. We show
how their economic models are fundamentally flawed. We reveal their
"science" as a dangerous pseudoscience. We ridicule them on TV. We
enlist our own, equally decorated ecological economists to debate them

Redefining Progress 203
point for point. We pop up in unexpected places like on the local busi-
ness news, on commercial breaks during the midnight movie and ran-
domly on national prime time.

At the same time, we lay a trap for the G-7 leaders. Our campaign
paints them as Lear-like figures, deluded kings unaware of the damage
their deepening madness is doing. We demand to know why the issue of
overconsumption in the First World is not even on their agenda. In the
weeks leading up to their yearly summit meeting, we buy radio and TV
spots on stations around the world that dare our leaders to answer the
Big Question: "Is Economic 'Progress' Killing the Planet? "

We make those six words blaze in the public imagination. We get
ordinary citizens to think about them, policymakers to debate them and
students to confront their teachers with them. Little by little we maneu-
ver the leaders into a position where suddenly, at a worldwide press
conference, they are forced to respond to a question like this: "Mr. Pres-
ident, how do you measure economic progress? How do you tell if the
economy is healthy or sick?"

The President will probably skate. He'll formulate some pat answer
about how America has a pretty good report card, what with one of the
best GDP growth rates and the record-setting bull run on Wall Street.
He'll try to move on. But a few reporters will keep pressing him and the
other leaders. They will demand a better answer — a real answer: Should
we consider the Exxon Valdez spill a "success," since it boosted GDP?
What other measures of economic progress besides the GDP are being
used? How are losses of natural capital like the disappearing salmon
fisheries of the Pacific Northwest being factored into the national
accounts? Are the costs of climate change being considered? What about
ozone depletion? Desertification? Biodiversity loss?

A point will be reached, either right there at the G-7 press confer-
ence or at some future press conference, when it dawns on the world
that these seven men and their economic policymakers can't be trusted
with the farm. They don't know the answer to the simplest and most
fundamental of all questions about the economic system they manage:
Are we moving forward or backward?

204 Culture Jam

This escalating war of nerves with the heads of state is the top jaw
of our Strategic Pincer. The bottom jaw of the pincer is the work that
goes on at a grassroots level, where neoclassical dogma is still being
propagated every day. Within university economics departments world-
wide, a wholesale mindshift is about to take place. The tenured profes-
sors who run those departments, the keepers of the neoclassical flame,
are as proud and stubborn as high-alpine goats, and they don't take well
to being challenged. But challenge them we will, fiercely, and with the
conviction that we are right and they are wrong.

Thomas Kuhn, in his now famous 1962 book The Structure of Sci-
entific Revolutions, describes how paradigm shifts in science are very
much like political revolutions. They are messy affairs that don't unfold
quickly or easily or without the painful overthrow of the people in
power.

Kuhn's most profound insight is that, in the real world, contrary to
the way scientific progress is supposed to happen, an old paradigm can-
not be replaced by new evidence, facts or "the truth." It can only be
replaced by another paradigm. In other words, the profession of econom-
ics will not change just because its forecasts are wrong, its policies no
longer work or its theories are proved unscientific. It will change only
when a new maverick generation of economists grabs the old-school
practitioners by the scruffs of their necks and throws them out of power.

How to Break the Neoclassical Trance

Start a culture-jamming group on your campus. Try to get postgraduate
economics students and at least one professor to join. Then wage meme
warfare. Gather potent quotes by famous economic visionaries as
rhetorical ammunition.

Departments of economics are graduating a generation of idiot
savants, brilliant at esoteric mathematics yet innocent of actual
economic life.

— Wassily Leontiev, Nobel Prize-winning economist

URBAN LITE*

206 Culture Jam

The standard texts are powerful instruments of disorientation;
for confusing the mind and preparing it for the acceptance of
myths of growing complexity and unreality.

— Guy Routh, The Origin of Economic Ideas

Before economics can progress it must abandon its suicidal for-
malism.

— Robert Heilbroner

Ridicule neoclassical logic every chance you get. Interrupt lectures.
Argue with your professors after class. Look them in the eye and ask the
same questions you might ask one of the G-7 leaders if you got the
chance: How do you measure economic progress? How do you tell if the
economy is progressing or regressing? If they cannot adequately answer
that question, then question the grounds on which their profession
gives policy advice to governments.

Plan a Real Economics Teach-in on your campus to coincide with
the next G-7 economic summit. Invite an ecological-economics
maverick like Herman Daly, Robert Costanza or Paul Hawken to speak.
Find out what other universities around the world are doing. Get your
hands on the sixty-second "G7-Ecocide" radio and TV spots from
Adbusters Media Foundation. Raise funds.

Air the "G7-Ecocide" message on campus radio in the weeks lead-
ing up to the summit. Try to buy a few sixty-second TV spots on your
local evening news on the day the G-7 leaders meet. Issue news releases
announcing your campaign. If a TV station refuses to sell you airtime,
publicize that fact. Fax local newspapers. Phone the TV newsrooms. On
the day the leaders meet, get reporters and TV crews out to cover your
teach-in.

A particularly effective economics teach-in was held at the Univer-
sity of Victoria, British Columbia, in May 1996. Stark white posters,
each with a quote challenging the legitimacy of neoclassical economies'
underlying assumptions, lined the walls to greet students and professors
alike one Monday morning.

MEME WAHFAHE TON IGKT1 -8Q0-663- T2S3

208 Culture Jam

Some students were not amused. "It feels like someone's telling
you, 'You're stupid, you're stupid' with every sign," one complained. But
the Alternative Economics Committee was prepared to bruise a few
egos. Deciding to deconstruct their professors' lesson plans for one day,
this group of committed students confronted what they termed "fatal
abstractions in economics" — the flaws of the neoclassical paradigm
taught as gospel in nearly all North American schools.

Teach-ins work. In the 1960s, student radicals created a forum to
address a burning question that was being glossed over or entirely ignored
during their classes: Just what was the U.S. doing in Vietnam? The teach-
ins that followed involved the brightest minds and the bravest professors
and served to both legitimize dissident thought and inspire action.

At UVic, rather than focusing on a single political issue, the stu-
dents took on the whole paradigm, examining the real-life conse-
quences of neoclassical economics.

The teach-in was a series of hourlong panels that ran all day. Orga-
nizers figured they'd have trouble finding faculty willing to challenge
the department, but they didn't. Disillusioned academics were burning
to air their grievances. Almost all speakers had more to say than their
fifteen minutes allowed. The rancor spilled over into a question period.

The economics department sent a lone defender, a professor
named Peter Kennedy, who gamely tried to keep up the side. At one
point he refuted an opponent's statement by referring the audience to a
certain page on a certain syllabus, as if to chastise the speaker for errant
study habits. But Professor Kennedy was condescending and could not
explain his position in plain language, which spoke volumes about the
fundamental problems in the department.

From speaker after speaker, memes flew.

"There's no social security in a world that consumes the biosphere
in which we live."

"Nuclear energy is touted as a 'cheap fuel.' But is the waste disposal
of spent nuclear fuel factored into the cost?"

Later, Professor Kennedy stepped to the podium for a second time.
He stood in front of the crowd, dressed in a casual shirt and jeans. The

Redefining Progress 209

anger and condescension were gone. "Economists are like weather fore-
casters," he said. "They explain, but they do not influence, events." He
admitted the need for interdisciplinary studies to cross-pollinate and
bring studies like economics into the real world. His defense of the holy
canon seemed labored. The students had him on the run.

Little insurrections like the one at UVic are seen more and more
frequently these days. In 1997, a group of students at Harvard Univer-
sity rebelled against the neoclassical doctrine taught them by Martin
Feldstein, a former adviser to President Ronald Reagan. The students
held weekly meetings, invited guest speakers and handed out dissenting
leaflets at Feldstein's lectures.

So far the rumblings of student discontent have not turned to open
defiance. The old-school practitioners like Feldstein live on, reinforced
by the politics of tenure, of who gets published and promoted, whose
research gets funded, and who gets plucked out of academia for a plum
political appointment when the next administration comes to power.
Within a global economy that more and more people are realizing is
unsustainable and doomed to fail, they toe the party line.

But not for too much longer.

At critical times throughout history, university students have
sparked massive protests, called their leaders on their lies and steered
their nations in brave new directions. It happened on campuses around
the world in the 1960s, and more recently in South Korea, China and
Indonesia. Now we have reached another critical historical moment.

It's hard to predict when the protests will begin en masse, or what
will trigger them. It could be a crash on Wall Street tomorrow, or cli-
mate change suddenly lurching out of control, or some freak happening
such as a charismatic economics student from the University of
Chicago confronting Alan Greenspan (or the president of the United
States) at a news conference in a dramatic showdown — a clash of eco-
nomic paradigms — that reverberates around the world.

Then, in the months that follow, on campus after campus, the stu-
dents will chase the old goats out of power and begin the work of repro-
gramming the doomsday machine.

EPILOGUE: THE MILLENNIAL MOMENT OF TRUTH

In all revolutions, the agents of change — usually a small core of fired-up
individuals — reach a personal point of reckoning where to do nothing
becomes harder than to step forward. Then come the televised actions,
the rebellions on campus, the random acts of defiance in high schools,
supermarkets, malls, workplaces. A mass of support accrues. The little
daily confrontations escalate. Momentum builds.

And finally the revolution ignites. Very often the ignition spark is a
symbolic act that takes the old power structure by surprise, a gesture
that becomes a metaphor, living forever. Rosa Parks refuses to give up
her seat on the bus. A Vietnam protester feeds a daisy into the barrel of
a rifle. A dissident stares down a line of tanks in Tiananmen Square.
Nelson Mandela walks out of his prison cell in South Africa. The TV
networks refuse to sell airtime for a citizen's ad. These memes penetrate
skulls like bullets.

The biggest impediment to revolution is a personal one: our own
deep-seated feelings of cynicism and impotence. How can anything we
do possibly make a difference? We have trouble accepting radical
change as a viable option. Entrenched in a familiar system, we cannot

212 Culture Jam

imagine others. It's hard to see our current condition as simply one
stage of a never-ending cycle that sooner or later will fall out of vogue
and be succeeded — but this is exactly how the world works. Just as psy-
choanalysis (which Freud compared to the Copernican and Darwinian
revolutions, and which was once widely considered the key to under-
standing human behavior) has pretty much given way to psychophar-
macology, and Christianity has been squeezed out in the West by a
fluid, New Age-y conception of spirituality, American-style consumer
capitalism will also lose favor. One day soon people will get sick of fast
food, fancy cars, fashion statements and shopping malls. They will stop
buying heavily advertised products because advertising is coercive,
tawdry and just increases the cost of the product. They will realize that
"the most advanced urban transportation system is not the automobile
but ...the bicycle, that the most promising power supplier of the future
is not a bigger electric utility grid, but a new kind of . . . shingle on your
roof, that the most efficient form of residential air conditioning is actu-
ally . . . a good shade tree." They will tire of the egocentric life of
ungoverned consumption and the media hype that fuels it. When a
stretch limo glides by in 2003, the pedestrian reflex won't be to peer
through the smoked panes for the celebrity inside, but to curse and
mock this ridiculous symbol of decadence and environmental harm.
The cool people of the next century will opt out of the spectacle and
live spontaneous "lives of playful opportunity." And our children, and
their children, will gaze back aghast upon our own time, a period of
waste and abandon on a scale so vast it knocked the planet out of
whack for a thousand years.

We don't need a million activists to jump-start this revolution. We just
need an influential minority that smells the blood, seizes the moment
and pulls off a set of well-coordinated social marketing strategies. We
need a certain level of collective disillusionment (a point I think we
have now reached) and then we need the leaders of the affluent, "First"
nations of the world to fumble a world crisis like a stock market collapse
or mismanage an environmental crisis like global warming. By waiting

Epilogue 213

for the right moment and then jamming in unison, I think a global net-
work of a few hundred activists can pull off the coup. Like J. K. Gal-
braith's archetypal "revolutionary," we will kick in the rotten door and
charge into the vacuum. We create a sudden, unexpected moment of
truth — a global mindshift — from which the corporate/consumerist
forces never fully recover.

In May 1968, the Situationist-inspired Paris riots set off "a chain
reaction of refusal" against consumer capitalism. First students, then
workers, then professors, nurses, doctors, bus drivers and a piecemeal
league of artists, anarchists and Enrages took to the streets, erected barri-
cades, fought with police, occupied offices, factories, dockyards, railway
depots, theaters and university campuses, sang songs, issued manifestos,
sprayed slogans like "Live Without Dead Time" and "Down with the
Spectacular-Commodity Culture" all over Paris, and challenged the
established order of their time in the most visceral way. The breadth of
the dissent was remarkable. "Art students demanded the realisation of art;
music students called for 'wild and ephemeral music'; footballers kicked
out managers with the slogan 'football to the football players'; gravedig-
gers occupied cemeteries; doctors, nurses, and the interns at a psychiatric
hospital organised in solidarity with the inmates." For a few weeks, mil-
lions of people who had worked their whole lives in offices and factories
broke from their daily routines and . . . lived.

It was "the largest general strike that ever stopped the economy of
an advanced industrial country, and the first wildcat general strike in
history," and it spread rapidly, first around Paris and France and then
around the world. At the height of the uprising in Paris's Latin Quarter,
fifty thousand people marched in Bonn, and three thousand took to the
streets in Rome. Three days later, students revolted at the University of
Milan. The next day, students staged a sit-in at the University of Miami.
Then skirmishes erupted in Madrid, Berkeley, New York City, Frankfurt
and Santiago. The wave reached London, Vancouver, Dakar, Munich,
Vienna and Buenos Aires, then Tokyo, Osaka, Zurich, Rio, Bangkok,
Dusseldorf, Mexico City, Saigon, La Paz, Chicago, Venice, Montreal and
Auckland. For a few heady weeks a tantalizing question hung in the air:

2U Culture Jam

What if the whole world turned into the Latin Quarter? Could this be
the beginning of the first global revolution?

As it turned out, this brief, hot happening the Situationists had
helped catalyze stopped short of becoming a full-fledged global mind-
shift. The protests petered out, governments restored control and the
status quo crept back in. The Situationists failed to get the ball over the
line, so to speak, because they were in several respects ahead of their
time. The spectacular, mediated world they so compellingly described,
and its menacing implications, were too new and strange for people in
the '60s to grasp fully. And the Situationists themselves were, I think,
caught wrong-footed. They and the students, workers, artists and intel-
lectuals they inspired didn't have their memes figured out. At the height
of the uprisings, when they had the ear of the world, they did not know
what to say beyond a few cryptic pronouncements. "The Beginning of
an Epoch," said the Situationists. "The death rattle of the historical irrel-
evants," said Zbigniew Brzezinski, the national security adviser to the
president of the United States.

The moral for culture jammers is, of course, Learn from this. Have
a well-thought-out and tested action plan, build a united global front
and be ready to scramble to the windward side when the boom swings
overhead, as it inevitably will.

We've had thirty years to think about what the Situationists were
talking about, and it's finally starting to make sense. In that interval of
time, modern media culture has metastasized. Consumer capitalism has
triumphed. We're in the spectacle. The spectacle is in us. We are living in
what Guy Debord, in the last years of his life, described as the "inte-
grated spectacle," characterized by "incessant technological renewal;
integration of state and economy; generalized secrecy; unanswerable
lies; an eternal present."

Today, a confused and deeply troubled population is ready to act
out. "Direct our cynicism, direct our rage," they seem to be saying.
Thirty years ago, the Situationists had a half-baked idea about detourn-
ing consumer capitalism, putting power in the hands of the people and

Epilogue 215

constructing a spontaneous new way of life. Now it's up to culture jam-
mers to finish the job.

Two generations of chronic overconsumption, decadence and
denial have weakened America™. American cool is now every bit as vul-
nerable as the Soviet Utopia was ten years ago. A revolution couldn't
happen there, but it did. It can't happen here, but it will. This is a
momentous occasion and we shouldn't doubt or fear, but celebrate. In
the dawn of this new millennium, one dream is ending and another
being born.

And I can't think of anything much cooler than that.

Notes

Introduction: Culture Jamming

xi "Culture Jamming" For more information see the Culture Jammers
Campaign Headquarters: <www.adbusters.org> and Adbusters magazine,
1243 West 7th Avenue, Vancouver, B.C. V6H 1B7, Canada; subscriptions@
adbusters.org: 1-800-663-1243 (in North America only).

xi On the genesis of "culture jamming": I first came across the term in a 1991
New York Times article by cultural critic Mark Dery. It was coined by the San
Francisco audio collage band Negativland on their 1994 release entitled
Jamcon '84, as a tribute to ham radio "jammers," who clog the airwaves with
scatological Mickey Mouse impersonations and other pop culture "noise."
Early culture jammers put graffiti on walls, liberated billboards, operated
pirate radio stations, rearranged products on supermarket shelves, hacked
their way into corporate and government computers and pulled off daring
media pranks, hoaxes and provocations. A new generation of "jammers" is
organizing "critical massing" rallies and "reclaim the streets" parties, launch-
ing social marketing TV campaigns, coordinating global events like Buy
Nothing Day and TV Turnoff Week, jamming G-7 economic summits, initi-
ating legal actions to revoke the charters of dysfunctional corporations, and
pioneering an ever more potent array of cultural interventions.

xiii "something to sell as well as to tell." This often repeated phrase was coined
by George Gerbner, founder of the Cultural Environmental Movement
and currently Bell Atlantic Professor of Telecommunication at Temple
University, Philadelphia.

xvi "Revolution is not showing life to people, but making them live." Guy
Debord, quoted by Len Bracken, Guy Debord Revolutionary (Feral House,
1997), page 1 10. 1 first saw this quote on the cover of Bracken's book.

xvi "We will jam its image factory until it comes to a sudden, shuddering halt."
For this phrase, I am indebted to Mark Dery, author of Culture Jamming:
Hacking, Slashing, and Sniping in the Empire of Signs (Westfield, N.J.: Open
Magazine Pamphlet Series, 1993).

218

Notes

xix Marshall McLuhan's "World War III" quote from Culture Is Our Business
(Ballantine Books, 1970), page 66.

Autumn

4 Elisabeth Kubler-Ross, On Death and Dying (Macmillan, 1969).

4 "For two million years our personalities and cultures were shaped by
nature." This idea was taken from the preface of Robert Kubey and Mihaly
Csikszentmihalyi's Television and the Quality of Life (L. Erlbaum, 1990), in
which the authors write: "By current estimates the first human beings
emerged on Earth approximately 2 million years ago. In this vast stretch of
time, approximately 100,000 human generations have lived and died, and
yet ours are among the first to live in a world where much of daily experi-
ence is shaped by widely shared, instantaneous mass communication."

4 "about as voluptuous a place as you can find on earth ..." Anne Lamott,
Bird by Bird (Anchor, 1995).

6 "Psychology As If the Whole Earth Mattered " conference, held at Harvard
University, fall 1990. From a report in the Center Review, Center for Psy-
chology and Social Change, an affiliate of Harvard.

6 On "our rampant, oblivious consumption ... is, simply, a sickness," see
Ecopsychology: Restoring the Earth, Healing the Mind, edited by Theodore
Roszak, Mary E. Gomes and Allen D. Kanner (Sierra Club Books, 1995).

9 "Is Everybody Crazy?" Jim Windolf, The New York Observer, October 20,
1997.

10 "Worldwide rates of major depression in every age group have risen
steadily since the 1940s." Elliot S. Gershon and Ronald O. Rieder, Scientific
American, September 1992, page 91.

10 "Rates of suicide, unipolar disorder, bipolar disorder and alcoholism have
all climbed significantly." Roger Bland, chair of psychiatry at the Univer-
sity of Alberta, in the Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, May 1997, as
reported by Robin Lawrence in The Georgia Straight, June 11, 1998.

10 "The U.S. has a higher rate of depression than almost every other country,
and cross-cultural data show that as Asian countries Americanize, their
rates of depression increase accordingly." Michael Yapko, Psychology Today,
May/June 1997.

Notes

10 Saul Bellow, Humboldt's Gift (Avon, 1975).

21?

12 "We know there's a correlation between TV viewing and voter apathy ..."
Michael Morgan and James Shanahan, "Television Viewing and Voting
1975-1989," Electoral Studies (1992), 1 l(l):3-20.

12 "We know that TV viewing is linked to childhood obesity ..." Ross E.
Andersen, "TV Viewing Linked to Childhood Obesity," Journal of the
American Medical Association (1998), 279:938-942.

15 Jerry Mander, Four Arguments for the Elimination of Television (Quill,
1978).

15 "Regular TV programming averaged ten technical events per minute and
commercials twenty. Twenty years later these figures have doubled. MTV
delivers sixty events per minute ..." John de Graaf, The Balaton Bulletin,
Fall 1997, page 24.

17 "The average North American witnesses five acts of violence . . . per hour
of prime-time network TV ... " This statistic was provided by George
Gerbner, Bell Atlantic Professor of Telecommunication, Temple Univer-
sity, Philadelphia.

17 "Two recent studies turned up conflicting results, and the head of one
research team ..." Michael Sunnan, research director of the Center for
Communications Policy at UCLA, quoted in The Globe and Mail Canada,
April 28, 1998.

19 "Every day, an estimated 12 billion display ads, 3 million radio commer-
cials, and more than 200,000 TV commercials are dumped into North
America's collective unconscious." From a rough calculation by Rick
Crawford, postgraduate researcher, Department of Computer Science,
University of California, Davis.

1 9 "Three thousand marketing messages per day." Mark Landler, Walecia Kon-
rad, Zachary Schiller and Lois Therrien, "What Happened to Advertising?"
Business Week, September 23, 1991, page 66. Leslie Savan in The Sponsored
Life (Temple University Press, 1994), page 1, estimated that "16,000 ads
flicker across an individual's consciousness daily." I did an informal survey
in March 1995 and found the number to be closer to 1,500 (this included
all marketing messages, corporate images, logos, ads, brand names, on TV,
radio, billboards, buildings, signs, clothing, appliances, in cyberspace, etc.,
over a typical twenty-four-hour period in my life).

220 Notes

19 "I think of those brainwashing experiments conducted by Dr. Ewen
Cameron ..." Bruce Grierson, "Soul Shock," Adbusters, Winter 1998, page 18.

21 "anti-language," a coinage of social critic George Steiner, was invoked in
this context by Jonathon Dee in "But Is It Advertising?" Harper's, January
1999, page 66.

2 1 "Adbusters Media Foundation" is a Vancouver, B.C.-based nonprofit soci-
ety that publishes Adbusters magazine, runs the Culture Jammers Cam-
paign Headquarters on the World Wide Web and creates social marketing
campaigns through its PowerShift advocacy advertising agency. Adbusters
Media Foundation, 1243 West 7th Avenue, Vancouver, B.C. V6H 1B7,
Canada; <www.adbusters.org>; adbusters@adbusters.org.

24 "Most information has long since stopped being useful for us ... " Neil
Postman, Technopoly (First Vintage Books, 1993).

25 "A 1998 survey of eleven- to fifteen-year-old boys and girls ..." Kunda
Dixit, Media Asia, Summer 1998, page 95.

25 "In a dozen Asia-Pacific countries surveyed by the A. C. Nielsen com-
pany ..." Normandy Madden, Advertising Age International, July 13, 1998.

26 "Everytown, U.S.A.": Rachel Carson, Silent Spring (Houghton Mifflin,
1962).

33 "Soviet dissidents used to talk about a 'public sphere of discourse' ..."
Taken from Jonathon Rowe, "The Tyranny of the Airwaves," Adbusters,
Winter 1991, page 10.

34 "Ninety percent of news editors surveyed in a 1992 Marquette University
study ..." Lawrence C. Soley and Robert L. Craig, "Advertising Pressures
on Newspapers: A Survey," Journal of Advertising, Volume XXI, Number 4,
December 1992.

34 "The PBS flagship NewsHour, which is underwritten by Archer Daniels
Midland ..." "Stories TV Doesn't Tell," The Nation, June 8, 1998, page 7.

34 "Double-click on 'Rocky Mountain High' and you'll find yourself at the
virtual headquarters of the record company selling a boxed set of Denver's
greatest hits." Taken from Ronald K. L. Collins, Adbusters, Winter 1998,
page 59.

Notes 221

35 "In 1997, Chrysler, one of the five largest advertisers in the U.S., sent letters
to one hundred newspaper and magazine editors ..." Gail Johnson,
Adbusters, Spring 1998, page 19. Confirmed by Alan Miller, Communica-
tions Department, at Chrysler's Auburn Hills, Michigan, office.

37 The laugh-track scenario was inspired by an article titled "Oka the
Promised Land," submitted to Adbusters by Kathleen Moore, May 1995.

39 "Reebok paid Tristar pictures a million and a half bucks ..." "Sneaky Busi-
ness," Entertainment Weekly, January 24, 1997.

40 Richard Condon, The Manchurian Candidate (F. A. Thorpe, 1959).

44 Sherry Turkle, Life on the Screen: Identity in the Age of the Internet (Simon
& Schuster, 1995).

44 Ann Beattie, "The Occidental Tourist," Esquire, September 1988, page 198.

45 Edmund Carpenter, Oh, What a Blow That Phantom Gave Me! (Holt,
Rinehart and Winston, 1973), page 3.

46 Fay Weldon, Wicked Women (Atlantic Monthly Press, 1997).

46 "the first concentrated study of the social and psychological effects of the
Internet, a two-year effort by Carnegie Mellon University ..." The New
York Times, August 30, 1998.

46 John Irving, A Prayer for Owen Meany (Morrow, 1989).

Winter

5 1 "The Cult You're In" chapter is based on Kono Matsu, "The Cult You're In,"
Adbusters, Summer 1998, pages 32-33.

56 The first International TV Turnoff Week was launched by Adbusters
Media Foundation in 1994. See Adbusters, Summer 1994, page 24. TV Free
America launched U.S. TV Turnoff Week in 1995.

62 The first International Buy Nothing Day was held on September 24, 1992,
the brainchild of Vancouver, B.C., artist Ted Dave. It has since grown into
a worldwide celebration of simple living. Now held on the last Friday of
every November (in some countries on the last Saturday), it is called Kauf
Nix Tag in Austria, Niet-Winkeldag in Belgium, Ala Osta Mitadn Paiva in

222

Notes

Finland, La Journee sans Achats in France, KaufNix Tag in Germany, Niet-
Winkeldag'm the Netherlands, Nullkoptagen in Norway, Dzien bezzakupow
in Poland, Dan brez nakupov in Slovenia, No Shop Day in the U.K., Kopva-
grardagen in Sweden and Nanimo Kawanai Hi in Japan.

63 "a bureaucratic society of controlled consumption." Henri Lefebvre, Critique
of Everyday Life (English translation, Verso, 1991), as quoted in Baudrillard for
Beginners, Chris Horrocks and Zoran Jevtic (Icon Books Ltd., 1996), page 8.

65 "The Unofficial History of America™" Much of the inspiration for this
chapter came from a little booklet called Taking Care of Business — Citi-
zenship and the Charter of Incorporation, by Richard L. Grossman and
Frank T. Adams (1993, Charter, Ink., P.O. Box 806, Cambridge, MA
02140). Also useful for an early history of corporations in the U.S. is
David C. Korten, When Corporations Rule the World (Berrett-Koehler
Publishers, 1995).

67 "Limits were placed on how big and powerful companies could become."
Grossman and Adams, page 8.

67 "The two hundred or so corporations that were operating ... by the year
1800 were each kept on a fairly short leash." Grossman and Adams, page 7.

67 "In 1832, President Andrew Jackson vetoed a motion. . . " Grossman and
Adams, page 12.

68 "President Abraham Lincoln . . . warned . . . , 'corporations have been
enthroned . . . ' " David R. Loy, A Buddhist Critique of Transnational Corpo-
rations (professor, Faculty of International Studies, Bunkyo University,
Chigasaki, Japan, <www.igc.apc.org/bpf/think.html>).

68 "In Santa Clara County v. Southern Pacific Railroad ..." Grossman and
Adams, page 20.

68 "Justice William O. Douglas concluded of Santa Clara ..." Grossman and
Adams, page 20.

69 "The shift amounted to a kind of coup d'etat ..." Loy, A Buddhist Critique
of Transnational Corporations.

69 "fifty-one of the world's hundred largest economies were corporations,
not countries." "Was Democracy Just a Moment?" The Atlantic Monthly,
December 1997, page 71.

Notes

223

70 "a student named Jennifer Beatty stages a protest against corporate spon-
sorship ..." Kari Lydersen, Chicago Ink, April 1998. Also Adjusters, Sum-
mer 1998, page 56.

70 "a student named Mike Cameron wears a Pepsi T-shirt on . . . 'Coke
Day' ..." Frank Swoboda, The Washington Post, March 26, 1998. Also
Adbusters, Summer 1998, page 56.

70 "moms and dads push shopping carts down the aisles of Toys 'R' Us." Gail
Johnson, "Consumers 'R' Us," Adbusters, Summer 1998, page 20.

70 "chemical giant Monsanto sics its legal team on anyone ..." "Monsanto's
Legal Thuggery," Food & Water Journal, Summer 1998, page 10.

70 "A Fox TV affiliate ..." Steve Wilson, "Fox in the Cow Barn," The Nation,
June 8, 1998, page 20. See also Jim Boothroyd, Adbusters, Winter 99,
page 20.

70 "The MAI would effectively create a single global economy ..." Craig Cox,
"A Magna Carta for Multinationals," Utne Reader, November 1997, page 16.

75 "Nine out of ten North American women feel bad about some aspect of
their bodies . . . " An Introduction to Food and Weight Problems, National
Eating Disorder Information Centre, Toronto, 1985, page 5.

75 "A 1992 survey of eleven- to fifteen-year-old Canadian girls revealed that
50 percent thought they should be thinner." The Health of Canada's Youth,
Health and Welfare Canada, 1992.

75 "Now girls as young as five are watching what they eat." Donna Ciliska,
Why Diets Fail (Second Story Press, 1994), page 80.

75 "50 percent of them are on a diet." "The War Within," Calgary Herald,
October 6, 1997, page B5.

75 "violin deformity." Elizabeth Haiken, Venus Envy: A History of Cosmetic
Surgery (John Hopkins, 1998), pages 299-300.

75 "batwing disorder." Ibid.

75 "Some models have removed their bottom ribs to accentuate the thinness
of their waists." Sunday New York Times, Home News, December 1995.

224

Notes

78 "Every three hours a new McDonald's opens somewhere in the world."
Richard Gibson, Wall Street Journal, January 22, 1996.

78 "The company spends over $1 billion every year on advertising." Advertis-
ing Age, September 28, 1998, page s4.

79 "The United States is the fattest nation on Earth ..." Humphrey Taylor,
president, Louis Harris and Associates, American Demographics, October
1991, page 10.

79 "Flight attendants sometimes use Diet Coke ..." Air Canada's in-flight
crews quickly learn that while all soft drinks work as drain cleaners to
some extent, Diet Coke works best, according to a friend who was a flight
attendant with the airline until 1993.

82 Jane Holtz Kay, Asphalt Nation (Crown Publishers, 1997).

85 "The Global Economic Pyramid Scheme." Parts of this chapter were
first published as "Voodoo at the Summit," in Adbusters, Summer 1997,
page 18.

86 "Ecologically speaking, the world is already 'full' ..." William E. Rees,
"Sustainability, Growth, and Employment: Towards an Ecologically Stable,
Economically Secure, and Socially Satisfying Future," University of British
Columbia, School of Community and Regional Planning, a paper pre-
pared for the International Institute for Sustainable Development, June
1994, page ii.

87 "There are no . . . limits to the carrying capacity of the Earth ..." Lawrence
Summers, quoted by William E. Rees and Mathis Wackernagel, Investing in
Natural Capital: The Ecological Economics Approach to Sustainability, A-M
Jannson, M. Hammer, C. Folke and R. Costanza, editors (Island Press,
1994), page 363.

87 "If it is easy to substitute other factors for natural resources ..." Robert
Solow, quoted by William E. Rees and Mathis Wackernagel, Investing
in Natural Capital: The Ecological Economics Approach to Sustainability,
page 365.

87 "We have in our hands — in our libraries really — the technology ..." Julian
Simon, The State of Humanity: Steadily Improving, Cato Policy Report
17:5, Washington, D.C., The Cato Institute, 1995.

Notes

225

87 William E. Rees and Mathis Wackernagel, Our Ecological Footprint: Reduc-
ing Human Impact on the Earth (New Catalyst, 1995).

87 "40 percent of terrestrial and 25 percent of marine photosynthesis have
now been diverted to human use." Rees, "Sustainability, Growth, and
Employment," page 1.

88 Robert Ayres, "Limits to the Growth Paradigm," Journal of the Interna-
tional Society for Ecological Economics (1996), 19:1 17-134.

88 For a compelling discussion of the shortcomings of the GDP as a measure
of progress, see "If the Economy Is Up, Why Is America Down?" by Clif-
ford Cobb, Ted Halstead and Jonathon Rowe, The Atlantic Monthly, Octo-
ber 1995. See also Kalle Lasn, "The Economics of the Last Hurrah,"
Adhusters, Volume 1, Number 3, page 65.

89 "Conducting economic policy based soly on the GDP is like driving your
car without a gas gauge." Ronald Coleman, professor of political sci-
ence at St. Mary's University, on CBC radio program, As It Happens,
November 24, 1997.

89 "A more accurate measure of economic progress." Herman Daly and John
Cobb, Jr., For the Common Good, Redirecting the Economy Towards Com-
munity, the Environment, and a Sustainable Future (Beacon Press,
1989), page 401.

90 "The difference between science and economics ..." Ferdinand E. Banks,
from a lecture he gave in Australia in 1989. His Energy Economics: A Mod-
ern Introduction will be published by Uppsala Economic Studies in 1999.

92 "creating $50 in play money for every $1 worth of real products ..." Joel
Kurtzman, The Death of Money (Simon 8c Schuster, 1993), page 65. The
quote actually reads: "... major actors in the global economy . . . play with
$20 to $50 (no one knows for sure) in the financial economy for every $1
in the real economy ..."

93 "Trillions of dollars slosh around this system ..." Richard Longworth,
Global Squeeze — The Coming Crisis for First World Nations (Contempo-
rary Books, 1998).

93 "97 percent of the world's monetary transactions ..." personal communica-
tion from Michel Chossudovsky, University of Ottawa. See also Patrick Harri-
son, "The Revolution Will Be Carbonated," Adhusters, Autumn 1998, page 65.

226

Notes

Spring

99 "The Revolutionary Impulse" The primary inspiration for this chapter
and the Situationist strain throughout this book came from: Greil Marcus,
Lipstick Traces — A Secret History of the Twentieth Century (Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1989); Len Bracken, Guy Debord — Revolutionary (Feral
House, 1997); Guy Debord, Comments on the Society of Spectacle (Verso,
1990); Situationist International Anthology, edited and translated by Ken
Knabb (Bureau of Public Secrets, 1981); Raul Vaneigem, The Revolution of
Everyday Life (Rebel Press/Left Bank Books, 1994); Guy Debord, The Soci-
ety of Spectacle (Zone Books, 1994), Simon Sadler, The Situationist City
(The MIT Press, 1998) and Sadie Plant, The Most Radical Gesture (Rout-
ledge, 1992). Start your journey with Marcus or Plant and then move on to
some of the original Situationist texts in Knabb's anthology. See Ken
Knabb's website: <www.slip.net/~knabb> for a few Situationist texts.

99 "one word of truth sounds like a pistol shot." Czeslaw Milosz, in his accep-
tance speech for the 1980 Nobel Prize for literature.

101 "putting switches on the street lamps ..." the Lettrist International,
quoted by Greil Marcus, Lipstick Traces — A Secret History of the Twentieth
Century (Harvard University Press, 1989), page 41 1.

101 " 'a moral, poetic, erotic, and almost spiritual refusal' to cooperate with
the demands of commodity exchange." Sadie Plant, The Most Radical Ges-
ture (Routledge, 1992), page 8.

101 "the 'spectacle' of modern life." Guy Debord, The Society of Spectacle (Zone
Books, 1994). Originally published in France as La societe du spectacle
(Buchet-Chastel, 1967).

102 On "derive," see Guy Debord, "Theory of the Derive," Knabb, page 50. See
also Bracken, page 66; Marcus, pages 168, 170; and Plant, pages 58-59.

102 For one of the most striking Situationist texts on the subject of cities and
derive, see Ivan Chtcheglov, "Formulary for a New Urbanism," 1953, in Sit-
uationist International Anthology, edited and translated by Ken Knabb
(Bureau of Public Secrets, 1981). I first read "Formulary for a New Urban-
ism" at: <www.slip.net/~knabb>.

102 "locomotion without a goal." Plant, page 58.

103 On "playful creation" of "situations," see Guy Debord, "Report on the Con-
struction of Situations and on the International Situationist Tendency's
Conditions of Organization and Action," Knabb, pages 17-25.

Notes

227

103 On "detournement" see Guy Debord and Gil J. Wolman, "Methods of
Detournement," Knabb, page 8; "Detournement as Negation and Prelude,"
Knabb, page 55; Plant, pages 86-89; and Marcus, pages 168, 170, 179, 372.

103 "radically reinterpreting world events such as the 1965 riots in Los
Angeles ..." See "The Decline and Fall of the Spectacle-Commodity
Economy," Internationale Situationniste #10, March 1966, Knabb, pages
153-160.

103 "a famous drawing of Lenin ..." See a picture of this drawing in Bracken,
page 64.

1 03 "the deadly diversion of the force of life in favor of an empty heaven . . . "; "God
is dead ..." For a full translation of this sermon, see Bracken, pages 10-11.

103 "devalue the currency of the spectacle." Marcus, page 179.

104 "a gigantic turning around of the existing social world." Plant, page 89.
104 "Even the tiniest of gestures ..." Plant, page 67.

104 "a new poetry of real experience and a reinvention of life are bound to
spring." Raul Vaneigem, The Revolution of Everyday Life (Rebel Press/Left
Bank Books, 1994), quoted by Plant, page 67.

104 "the citizens of the most advanced societies on earth, thrilled to watch
whatever it is they're given to watch." Marcus, page 99.

105 "provisional and lived." The Situationists, quoted by Marcus, page 175.

105 "the "bizarre" quarter, the "sinister" quarter, the "tragic" quarter ..." Ivan
Chtcheglov, in Knabb, page 1.

105 "I wrote much less than most people who write, but drank much more
than most people who drink." See Bracken, page viii.

105 "our kind will be the first to blaze a trail into a new life." Karl Marx,
adopted by Guy Debord, and quoted by Marcus, page 185.

105 "believe in faster trains and more traffic ..." L.T.C. Rolt, High Horse Rid-
erless (G. Allen & Unwin, 1947).

106 "Generations of poets, prophets, and revolutionaries, not to mention
lovers, drug-takers ..." Plant, page 39.

228

Notes

108 "The detournement of the right sign, in the right place at the right time ..."
Marcus, page 179.

108 "would leave nothing to chance." Gil Wolman, quoted by Marcus, page 358.

112 "fin de millenium atmosphere of postmodernity." Plant, page 5.

114 "Establishment and Resistance in one convenient package." Tom Frank,
Commodify Your Dissent: Salvoes from the Baffler (Norton, 1977), page 35.

1 14 Juliet B. Schor, The Overspent American — Upscaling, Downshifting, and the
New Consumer (Basic Books, 1998).

114 Hal Niedzviecki, "Are We Really Depressed? — Introducing Malaise Cul-
ture," Broken Pencil, Issue 5, November 1997, page 14.

118 "Allen Ginsberg, who found that ..." Rick Salutin, The Globe and Mail,
May 16, 1997, page CI.

119 "Project Censored." Sonoma State University, http://censored.sonoma.edu/
ProjectCensored/.

119 "Lewis Lapham . . . steadfastly refused to be drawn into the debate." The
invitation to debate "the ethical and moral ramifications of running
tobacco ads" came in an open letter to Lewis H. Lapham in Adbusters,
Summer 1994, page 79. Lapham's first "response" appeared in Adbusters,
Winter 1995, page 91. Then, "The Ball's in Your Court Now Lewis,"
Adbusters, Summer 1995, page 62. Lapham's second "response" appeared
in Adbusters, Fall 1995, page 5, and his comments to The Globe and Mail,
in Adbusters, Winter 1995, page 5. Further thrusts and parries in Adbusters,
Spring 1996.

121 "a ruthless criticism of all that exists." Karl Marx, 1843, adopted by the Sit-
uationists, and quoted by Marcus, page 175.

121 "We will wreck this world." Internationale Situationniste #1, June 1958,
quoted by Marcus, page 175.

123 "The Meme Wars." The title of this chapter is taken from Kalle Lasn, "The
Meme Wars," Adbusters, Autumn 1998, pages 6 and 7.

123 The word "meme" was coined by evolutionary biologist Richard Dawkins
in The Selfish Gene (Oxford University Press, 1976). Derived from a Greek
root meaning "to imitate," the word describes how memes mimic the

Notes 229

behavior of genes, propagating not body to body but "by leaping from
brain to brain."

123 The term "meme warfare" was coined by Paul Spinrad in Adbusters, Win-
ter 1995, page 40.

123 "a guerrilla information war." Marshall McLuhan, Culture Is Our Business
(Ballantine Books, 1970), page 66.

130 Limits to Growth, Donella Meadows, Dennis L. Meadows, Jorgen Randers,
William W. Behrens III et al. (Universe Books, 1972).

130 "The manager of a housing co-op was ..." I first read this story in an arti-
cle titled "Places to Intervene in a System," by Donella Meadows, in Whole
Earth, Winter 1997, page 82.

Summer

Many of the activist strategies in this part were originally published in Adbusters,
Blueprint for a Revolution issue, Autumn 1998, and subsequent issues.

139 "Whadd'ya got?" Marlon Brando in The Wild One, 1954, directed by Las-
zl6 Benedek.

140 "slave component." Sadie Plant, zeroes + ones: digital women + the new
technoculture (Fourth Estate, 1997), page 4.

143 "Lying is the major form of human stress ..." Brad Blanton, Radical Hon-
esty (Dell, 1996), page xxv (preface).

145 "Sovereign people do not beg of, or negotiate with subordinate entities . . ."
"When a subordinate entity violates ..." Richard Grossman, "The Rela-
tionship of Humans to Corporations," an article he submitted to Adbusters
in February 1997.

149 "Marshall McLuhan's World War III . . . " See Marshall McLuhan, Culture Is
Our Business (Ballantine Books, 1970), page 66.

150 "Reframe Debates." This section was inspired by a story that Paul Cienfue-
gos, founding director, Democracy Unlimited of Humboldt County, told
me circa May 1997.

230 Notes

154 "How much harm does a company have to do before we question its right
to exist?" Paul Hawken, The Ecology of Commerce — A Declaration ofSus-
tainability (HarperBusiness, 1993).

157 "A corporation has no heart, no soul, no morals." This idea is taken from
Professor David R. Loy, A Buddhist Critique of Transnational Corporations
(Professor in the Faculty of International Studies, Bunkyo University, Chi-
gasaki, Japan; <www.igc.apc.org/bpf/think.html>).

160 "revoke the charter of the Standard Oil Trust of New York." Richard L.
Grossman and Frank T. Adams, Taking Care of Business — Citizenship and
the Charter of Incorporation (1993, Charter, Ink., P.O. Box 806, Cambridge,
MA 02140), page 17.

160 "The state of Pennsylvania revoked the charters of a number of banks ..."
Ibid.

160 "Michigan, Ohio and New York revoked the charters of ... " Ibid.

160 "In 1890, the highest court in New York State revoked ..." Grossman,
"The Relationship of Humans to Corporations."

160 "In 1976, U.S. Supreme Court Justices White, Brennan and Marshall noted
that ..." Ibid.

160 "In May 1998, New York Attorney General Dennis Vacco ..." The Wall
Street Journal, May 4, 1998, page A8. See also Randy Ghent, Adbusters,
Autumn 1998, page 58.

160 "In Alabama . . . Judge William Wynn ..." Randy Ghent, "Alabama Judge
Threatens Big Tobacco," Adbusters, Winter 1999, page 54.

161 "On September 10, 1998, in what may be ... " Randy Ghent, "Lawyers
Guild Petition to Shut Down Unocal," Adbusters, Winter 1999, page 54.

161 "And ... in the fiercely political university town of Areata, California ..."
Randy Ghent, Adbusters, Winter 1999, page 51.

161 "centrally planned by global megacorporations"? David C. Korten, The
Post-Corporate World — Life After Capitalism (Berrett-Koehler Publishers,
Inc., 1999), page 1.

169 Faith Popcorn, The Popcorn Report (HarperCollins, 1992).

Notes

231

169 Duane Elgin, Voluntary Simplicity — Toward a Way of Life That Is Out-
wardly Simple, Inwardly Rich (revised edition, William Morrow, 1993).

169 Vicki Robin and Joe Dominguez, Your Money or Your Life: Transforming
Your Life and Achieving Financial Independence (Viking, 1992).

169 "... The aggregate level of American life fulfillment ..." See also Yearning
for Balance — Views of Americans on Consumption, Materialism, and the
Environment, prepared for the Merck Family Fund by The Harwood
Group, July 1995.

171 Juliet B. Schor, The Overspent American — Upscaling, Downshifting, and the
New Consumer (Basic Books, 1998).

1 72 E. F. Schumacher, Small Is Beautiful: A Study of Economics as If People Mat-
tered (Blond and Briggs, 1973).

172 Frances Moore Lappe\ Diet for a Small Planet (Ballantine Books, 1991).

174 Brewster Kneen, Invisible Giant — Cargill and Its Transnational Strategies
(Pluto Press, 1995). See also Brewster Kneen, "Taking On the Food
Giants," Adbusters, Spring 1997, page 18.

174 "The average pound of food ..." Lynette Lamb, "Are Fresh Fruits and Veg-
etables Really Healthy?" Utne Reader, Number 23.

175 "Over 50 percent of the calories in this Big Mac come from fat." From
www.mcdonalds.com, McDonald's website.

176 "the most profoundly disturbing campaign in TV history." Bob Garfield,
"Publicity Monster Turns on Klein," Advertising Age, September 4, 1995,
page 18.

179 "Several high-profile architects ..." See Moshe Safdie with Wendy Kohn,
The City After the Automobile — An Architect's Vision (Stoddart, 1997).

180 "Your private automobile will cost you ..." For an accounting of the social
and environmental costs of automobiles see Transportation Cost Analysis:
Techniques, Estimates and Implications, Victoria Transport Policy Institute,
Todd Litman, director, litman@islandnet.com.

185 "Media Carta." Parts of this chapter first appeared in Adbusters, Winter
1999, pages 16-29.

232

Notes

186 "The great power of these organizations lies in their vertical integration . . ."
This idea came from Richard Masur, president of the Screen Actors Guild,
The Nation, June 8, 1998, page 30.

188 David Grossman, On Killing: The Psychological Cost of Learning to Kill in
War and Society (Little, Brown, 1995).

188 "Every time the story gets to a higher level, it's killed." David Grossman in
a telephone interview with Bruce Grierson, September 7, 1998.

188 "Without fail, remorse or hesitation ..." Grossman-Grierson interview.

189 "The broadcasters may be powerful enough ..." Grossman-Grierson
interview.

189 "Parents of the shooter ..." Grossman-Grierson interview.

194 Paul Klite, executive director, Rocky Mountain Media Watch. See Jerry M.
Landay, "Getting a Movement Going," The Nation, June 8, 1998, page 10.
See also Jim Boothroyd, Adbusters, Winter 1999, pages 26, 27.

196 " . . . one of America's most powerful litigators ..." Talk with Stephen
Rohde in March 1998.

197 "... a high-profile Los Angeles media attorney and former president
of the Beverly Hills Bar Association ..." Talk with Barry Shanley in
March 1998.

197 Aldous Huxley, Brave New World (Coles Publishing Co., 1994).

201 "Redefining Progress" is the name of the San Francisco think tank that
pioneered the Genuine Progress Indicator (GPI). Their Community Indi-
cators Handbook helps communities start their own economic well-being
indicators projects, <www.rprogress.org> (415) 781-1191.

201 "the human experiment on Planet Earth is veering out of control ..." This
idea was taken from World Scientists, Warning to Humanity, by the Union
of Concerned Scientists (UCS), April 1993.

202 "First we kill all the economists ..." This "How To Break the Neoclassical
Trance" strategy first appeared as "How to Break the Voodoo Spell,"
Adbusters, Summer 1997, page 25.

Notes

233

204 Thomas S. Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (University of
Chicago Press, 1962, 1970).

204 "Kuhn's most profound insight . . . grabs the old-school practitioners by
the scruffs of their necks and throws them out of power." Taken from Kalle
Lasn, "Voodoo Economics," Adbusters, Volume 1, Number 3, page 57.

206 "A particularly effective economics teach-in was held at the University of
Victoria ..." "It feels like someone's telling you, 'You're stupid ..."
"There's no social security in a world that consumes the biosphere ..."
"Nuclear energy is touted as ... " This story was taken from Jim
Munroe, "Students Give Teachers a Failing Grade," Adbusters, Winter
1996, pages 32, 33.

Epilogue: The Millennial Moment of Truth

211 On "millennial moment of truth ..." see more in-depth discussion, Kalle
Lasn, "Editor's Blast," Adbusters, Spring 1998, page 6.

212 "the most advanced urban transportation system is not the automobile
but ...the bicycle, . . . shingle on your roof, ...a good shade tree." These three
ideas were taken from Ed Ayres, editor, WorldWatch magazine, September
1998, page 3.

213 "a chain reaction of refusal ..." Len Bracken, GuyDebord — Revolutionary
(Feral House, 1997), pages 174-175.

213 "Enragis." For a description of the role that this group of radicals played in
the 1968 Paris riots, see Bracken, pages 157-175.

2 1 3 "Live Without Dead Time" See On the Poverty of Student Life, by the mem-
bers of the Situationist International and the students of Strasbourg Uni-
versity, Situationist International Anthology, edited and translated by Ken
Knabb (Bureau of Public Secrets, 1981), page 337.

213 "Art students demanded the realisation of art; music students called for
'wild and ephemeral music'; footballers'. . . " Sadie Plant, The Most Radical
Gesture (Routledge, 1992), page 98.

213 "the largest general strike that ever stopped the economy of an advanced
industrial country, and the first wildcat general strike in history . . ." Inter-
nationale Situationniste #12, September 1969, Situationist International

234 Notes

Anthology, translated by Ken Knabb (Bureau of Public Secrets, 1981),
page 225.

213 "At the height of the uprising in Paris 's Latin Quarter . . . three thousand
took to the streets in Rome. Three days later ..." Bracken, pages 174-175.

214 "The Beginning of an Epoch." The title of an article in Internationale Situ-
ationniste#\2, September 1969, Knabb, pages 225-256.

214 "The death rattle of the historical irrelevants ..." Zbigniew Brzezinski,
quoted by Greil Marcus, Lipstick Traces (Harvard University Press, 1989),
page 32.

214 "incessant technological renewal; integration of state and economy; gener-
alized secrecy; unanswerable lies; an eternal present." Guy Debord, Com-
ments on the Society of Spectacle (Verso, 1998), pages 11,12.

Graphic Credits

2 Tubehead Photo: Julie Lee

5 She's Got Your Eyes Concept: Warren Neily; photo: Shannon Mendes

8 Prozac Concept: Adbusters; photo: Karen Redfern; model: Gail Johnson

28 Skulling Photo: Sandy Rolick

36 Consumerism for Beginners Cartoon: Clay Butler

42 Hamburger Eater Collage: Judy Wapp

50 McNation Chris Woods, courtesy of the Diane Farris Gallery;
photo: Bob Fugger

56 TV Turnoff "Week Poster Design: Chris Dixon

58 Consumption Void Photo: Jennifer Van Evra; model: Ken Paul

62 Buy Nothing Poster Design: Chris Dixon

64 American Soldier Illustration: Michael Maslin, courtesy of The Trends
Journal

72 Corporate Tattoos Photo: Shannon Mendes
77 Obsession for Women Concept: Nicholas Racz; photo: Rick Etkin
98 Paris, May 1968 Photo: Bruno Barbey, Magnum Photos, New York
110 Obsession for Men Photo: Nancy Bleck; model: Cayvan Econmi
120 Joy Photo: Thomas Antel

122 Life, Spirit, Joy Photo: Lydia Eccles and Wendy Hamer

236 Graphic Credits

126 Autosaurus TV Uncommercial: Director/animator: Bill Maylone

138 Weasel Tail Jan Prither

142 The Product Is You TV Uncommercial: Director: Geoff Rogers
144 Organized Crime Collage: Lu Mannseichner

151 Why Are You Buying Your Food from a Tobacco Company? Concept: Kono
Matsu

156 JoeChemo Concept: Scott Pious; illustration: Ron Turner

170 Buy Nothing Day TV Uncommercial: Director/animator: Bill Maylone

173 Grease Concept: Charles Dobson; photo: Daniel Illicic; model: Nadroj
Seever

177 Obsession Fetish TV Uncommercial: Director: Katherine Dodds

182 Nothing™ Billboard Fiona Jack

200 System Error Photos: Mackenzie Stroh

205 The Big Question Billboard Photo: AP Photo, Alexander Zemlianichenko
207 G-7 Ecocide TV Uncommercial: Director: Geoff Rogers

Index

Page numbers in italics refer to illustrations.

AAAA (American Association of

Advertising Agencies), 187
Abbey, Edward, 117
ABC, 32, 35, 38, 196
academics, 115-117
A. C. Nielsen company, 25
acts, beautiful vs. moral, 6-7
Adbusters, 31, 117, 119
Adbusters Media Foundational
CBCsuedby, 194-196
magazine and website of, 3 1
television campaigns of, 31-33, 56, 58,

62,95, 126, 142, 170, 177, 193,206,207
website of, 132
A.d.i.d.a.s (All Day I Dream About

Suicide), 1 15
advertisers, media power of, 33-35
advertising, 18-21, 22-23, 24, 1 19, 166,
167, 175

subvertising and, 131-132, 133-134

television rates for, 184
Advertising Age, 22, 176
"advertrocities," 22-23
Alabama, 155, 160-161
Albania, 90-92, 94
alcoholism, 9, 10
Allen, Woody, 22, 52
Alternative Economics Committee, 208
ambient noise, 13-14
America™, 146,215

cool and, 113-114

corporate control of, xii-xiii

global influence of, xiv

uncooling of, xvi-xvii

unofficial history of, 65-71
American Association of Advertising

Agencies (AAAA), 187
American Convention on Human Rights,
186

American Dream, end of, 59-63
American Medical Association ( AMA),
188

America's Funniest Home Videos, 37
Amusing Ourselves to Death (Postman), 24
"Anarchy in the U.K.," 100
anger, xv, 12, 139
"anti-language," 2 1

antitrust legislation and lawsuits, 67, 193

anxiety, 9

Apple, 102

Areata, Calif., 161

Archer Daniels Midland, 34, 172

Asian "tiger" economies, 94

Asphalt Nation (Holtz), 82

Australia, 20,21

authenticity, "kidnapping" of, 101
auto industry, 82-83

"Autosaurus" television campaign, 31, 126
Ayres, Robert, 88

Babette's Feast, 79-80
"bads," 89
Baffler, 114
bank charters, 67
banks, disputes with, 148
Banks, Ferdinand, 90
Barings Bank, 93
Barnes & Noble, 34
"batwing disorder," 75
Baudrillard, Jean, 40
Beatles, 101
Beattie, Ann, 44-45
Beatty, Jennifer, 70
"beautiful acts," 6-7
Before Sunrise, 102
Bellow, Saul, 10-11
Benetton, 22-23, 26
Bentley, David, 20

238

Index

Berisha, Sali, 92
Bertelsmann, 186
Bestfoods, 20

Beverly Hills Bar Association, 197
bicycles, bike lanes, 179, 180
Big Enemies, 105
Bill of Rights, 68
bioeconomics, 86-90, 202-203
Bird by Bird (Lamott), 4-5
Black, Conrad, 25
Black Friday, 94
Black Monday, 93, 94
"black shakes," 24
Blanton, Brad, 143
body image, 12, 73-74, 75
Boeing, 79
Bonn, 213

Borderline Personality Disorder, 9

boredom, 105

Boston, Mass., 193

Boston Tea Party, 66

bovine growth hormone, 70

boycotts, 158, 163

Bradbury, Ray, 169

brain, 1 16

brainwashing, 19

Brando, Marlon, 139

Brave New World (Huxley), 197-198

"breaking the old syntax," 107

Brennan, William J., 160

British Columbia, 30-3 1

British East India Company, 66

British Petroleum, 179

Brown, Willie, 179

Buddhism, 11, 106, 107, 108, 143, 157, 191
Bulgaria, 90
bulimia, 73

Bunkyo University, 157
"Buy Nothing Day," 32, 33, 62, 95, 1 32,
170

Byrne, David, 52

CAA (Canadian Advertising Association),
187

California, 4-6, 161

Calvin Klein, 23, 131, 175-179

Cameron, Ewen, 19

Cameron, Mike, 70
Canada, 25, 75,92,119,178
Canadian Advertising Association (CAA),
187

Canadian Broadcasting Corporation

(CBC), 29, 31, 32, 194-196
Canadian Radio-Television and

Telecommunications Commission

(CRTC), 30, 187,193, 194
capitalism, consumer, see consumer

capitalism
Cargill, 172

Carnegie Mellon University, 46
Carpenter, Edmund, 45
cars, 80-83,131,133

uncoolingof, 179-181
Carson, Rachel, 26
"cashing out," 169
Catholic Church, 103
CBC (Canadian Broadcasting

Corporation), 29, 31, 32, 194-196
CBS, 32,33,35,196
censorship, 1 19

Center for Psychology and Social

Change, 6
Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), 19
CFAX, 190-191
channel-surfers, 15
chat groups, on Internet, 43—44
Chicago, University of, 209
children, television's effects on, 3-4, 12
China, 94, 115, 192,211
Christianity, 212
Christie, Linford, 20
Chronic Fatigue Syndrome, 9
Chrysler, 35

cigarette companies, 119, 131, 151,
160-161
uncoolingof, 13, 125-127
citizens' groups, 134-135
civil disobedience, xv
civil rights movement, xi, 155, 21 1
Civil War, U.S., 67-68, 69
Clinton, Bill, 192
Clockwork Orange, A, 1 1-12
CNBC, 188

CNN, 32, 95, 133,178,186

Index

239

Cobain, Kurt, 52
Cobb, John, 89

Coca-Cola, 21, 25, 39, 70, 79, 174
"Coke Day," 70
Coleman, Ronald, 89
college student apathy, 1 15
"commodity sign value," 40
communism, 140
Condon, Richard, 40
confronting corporations, 149-150
Congress, U.S., 159
Constitution, U.S., 68, 161
consumer capitalism, xvi, 106, 140

cartoon about, 36

as cult, 51-57

diminished expectations and, 51-52

flavor fading from, 212

programming of consumers in, 37—41

uncoolingof, 169-172

unethical nature of, xv
cool, 38,63, 106,212,215

corporate manufacture of, xiii

cynicism and, xv-xvi

definitions of, 1 13-1 14

as global phenomenon, xiv

see also uncooling
corporate trusts, 69
corporations, 73-83

evolution of, 66-71

grounding of, 157-163

legal "personhood" of, 68-69, 124, 157,
161

legal responsibility of, 158-160
political and cultural power of, xii-xiii,

xvii, 67-7 1,145
revoking charters of, 160-163, 162
seizing control from, 145-155
social contract between consumers
and, 76-78

"corrections," in stock market, 93

cortex of brain, 116

Cosio d'Arroscia, 100

Costanza, Robert, 206

Council for Tobacco Research, 160

crime rates, 60

CRTC (Canadian Radio-Television
Commission), 30, 187, 193, 194

Cruise, Tom, 38

Crystal Cruises, 34

culthood, consumer capitalism and,
51-57

culture:

corporate control of, xiii, xvii
excellence and, 113
global homogenization of, 25-26
lateral vs. vertical spreading of, 102
oppositional, xvii

Culture Jammer's Campaign Head-
quarters, 3 1

culture jamming:

assertiveness training workshop for,

145-155
as direct action, 129-136
as ethical imperative, xv
living in the moment and, 106
manifesto of, 128
overviews of, xvi-xvii, 1 1 1-1 13
practitioners of, xi-xii, 111-112
in revolutionary continuum, 99
social potential of, 135-136
as stopping the flow of spectacle, 107

"culture of simulation," 46

Culture Trust, 1 14

"cut," 175

cyberfeminists, 117
cyberjamming, 132-133
cyberspace, see Internet
cynicism, xv-xvi, 25, 141, 143,211

Dadaists, 99,100,102
Daly, Herman, 89, 206
Debord, Guy:

on revolution, xvi

suicide of, 102, 105

writings of, 102-103, 104, 106, 214
Declaration of Independence, 66
Declaration of the Rights of Man and of

the Citizen, 186
demarketing, 124, 149-150, 164, 165-183

description of, 166-167

detourningmd, 168

uncooling and, 169-183
democracy, 185, 188
"democracy of false desire," 104

260

Index

Denver, Colo., 194
Denver, John, 34
"depatterning" experiments, 19
depression, 9, 10
derivatives, 93
derive, 102-103
detournement, 108, 146,214

definition of, xvii, 103

demarketing and, 168

learning to, 147-148

subvertising as, 131-132
Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of
Mental Disorders (DSM IV), 6
Diana, Princess, 39-40
Diesel jeans, 23

Diet for a Small Planet (Lappe) ,172
direct action, 129-136

finding leverage points for, 130-131

pincer strategy for, 134-136

subvertising as, 131-132

television and, 133-134
disinformation, 24
Disney, 186, 193
dissociative disorders, 44
distancing, 172-174
Dominguez, Joe, 169
doomsday meme, 124
Doordarshan, 25
Douglas,WilliamO.,68
Dow Jones Industrial Average, 93-94
downshifters, 53, 169-172
Dunn, Seth, 179
Dylan, Bob, 102

Earth summits, 116
Eastern Europe, 90-92
eating disorders, 73
ecocide, xiv
ecofeminists, 117

ecological economics, 86-90, 202-203
Ecology of Commerce, The (Hawken), 154
ecology of mind, 9-27

advertising and, 18-21

environmental movement of the mind
and, 26-27

erosion of empathy and, 22-23

information overload and, 23-24

infotoxins and, 24-25

jolts and, 15-17,22

media-induced shock and, 17-18

mental environment and, 1 3

noise and, 13-15, 16

psychological ailments and, 9-10

quantifying effects of mental pollution
on, 16-17

unreality and, 21-22
economics, see global economy
"eco-rage," 141
eco taxes, 181
education, 189
Eisner, Michael, 140
electricity meters, 130
Elgin, Duane, 169
"emoticons," 46
empathy, erosion of, 22-23
Enrages, 213

environmental issues, xiv, 1 3, 26, 82, 203
academics and, 115-1 16
ecological economics and, 86-90
Nobel Prizewinners' warning about, 201
radical solutions needed for, 112

environmental lobby, 153

environmental movement, xi
for mental pollution, 26-27

E.R., 169

Ernst and Young, 93
Esquire, 44
Estonia, 33
EX, 38

European Round Table of Industrialists

(ERT), 70
Evans, Ga., 70
excellence, 113
exotic dancers, 75-76
expansionist economics, 86-88, 94,

202-203
Extra, 118
Exxon, 158

Exxon Valdez, 88-89, 203

Fashion File, 178
fashion industry, xi

Adbusters critique of, 3 1

uncoolingof, 131, 175-179

Index

241

fast food, 78, 79, 131, 133, 150-152

uncoolingof, 172-175
faxes, 147

Federal Communications Commission
(FCC), 187, 189, 193, 194

Federal Reserve, 94

Feldstein, Martin, 209

feminism, xi, 1 17-1 18

fight-or- flight response, 15

film commune, 29

Finch, Peter, 141

First Amendment, 194, 196-197

"flaming," 44

food, 78-80

chemical additives in, 13, 78-79
cigarette company ownership of,
151

see also fast food
"Forests Forever," 30-31
Four Arguments for the Elimination of

Television (Mander), 15
Fox TV, 70
"framing," 44-45
France, xvi, 102,186,213
Frank, Tom, 114

free speech, 68, 185-186, 187, 194-196
Freud,Sigmund,212

Gablik,Suzi,117

Galbraith,J.K.,213

Gandhi, M. K., xv

Gap (store), 102

Garfield, Bob, 22, 176

GDP (Gross Domestic Product), 88-90,

91, 112,203
General Electric, 158, 186
Genuine Progress Indicator (GPI), 90
Germany, 89, 90
Gibson, William, 24
Ginsberg, Allen, 118
Gitter, Richard, 32
global economy, 71, 85-96

as doomsday meme, 124

expansionist vs. ecological views of,
86-90,94,202-203

measuring growth in, 88-90, 91

pyramid schemes and, 90-92, 94

global warming, 1 16
"God is dead," 103
gold fraud, 92
"goods," 89

GPI (Genuine Progress Indicator), 90

grassroots action, 134-135

Great Britain, 89, 90

Greenbrier High School, 70

Greenpeace, 153

Greenspan, Alan, 94, 209

grief, stages of, 4

Gross Domestic Product (GDP), 88-90,

91, 112,203
Grossman, David, 188-189
Grossman, Richard, 145-146
Gross World Product, 84
G-7,85, 86,94,95,203,206
"G-7 Ecocide," 206, 207
"guerrilla information war," 123-124
Guess? jeans, 23
Gulf War, 89

Hang Seng Index, 93
Haraway, Donna, 117
Harper's, 1 19
Harvard University, 6, 209
Hasselhoff, David, 140
Hawke, Ethan, 102
Hawken, Paul, 154, 206
Hawkins, Libby, 32
Headline News, 95, 133
Heilbroner, Robert, 206
Henry V(Shakespeare), 135
High Horse Riderless (Rolt), 105-106
Hits FM, 25
Hoffman, Abbie, 117
holidays, 55,181-182
Hong Kong, 93, 192
Hudson's Bay Company, 66
Humboldt's Gift (Bellow), 10-1 1
"hungry ghosts," 143
Huxley, Aldous, xiii, xv, 143, 192,
197-198

IBM, 113
income gap, 114
Independence Day, 38

242

Index

Index of Sustainable Economic Welfare

(ISEW), 89-90, 91
India, 25
individualism, 65
Indonesia, 92, 115
industrial pincers, 134-136
information overload, 23
infotoxins, 24-25
instincts, honoring of, xv
"integrated spectacle," 214
International Chamber of Commerce, 70
Internationale Situationniste, 103, 121
International Monetary Fund (IMF), 70,

85

Internet, 7, 34,102,190

chat groups on, 43-44

cyberjamming on, 132-133

social and psychological effects of,
43-46

as unreality, 21-22
Inuit, 7

investment funds, 92-93

Invisible Giant (Kneen), 174

Irving, John, 46-47

ISEW (Index of Sustainable Economic

Welfare), 89-90, 91
Italy, 100

Jackson, Andrew, 67

Japan, xiv, 94, 106, 118-119

Jerry Maguire, 39

Jesus, 119

Jiang Zemin, 192

John, Elton, 39

jolts, 15-17,22

definition and effects of, 15, 16-17

on television, 15-16, 17
Jonesboro,Ark.,188, 189
Journal of the International Society for

Ecological Economics, 88
"joy-to-stuff ratio," 169
junk food, see fast food
Justice Department, U.S., 176

Kael, Pauline, 40
Kamakura, 106
Kant, Immanuel, 6

Kathmandu, 25
Kay, Jane Holtz, 82
Kennedy, Peter, 208-209
Kerouac, Jack, 102
Kidder Peabody, 93
"kidnapping," of authenticity, 101
King, Martin Luther, Jr., xv
Klein,Calvin,131,176,178
Kline, Alice, 171
Klite, Paul, 194
Kneen, Brewster, 174
Korea, North, 23, 115
Kubler-Ross, Elisabeth, 4
Kuhn, Thomas, 204

"ladder of truth," 187-188

Lamott, Anne, 4-5

Lapham, Lewis, 119

Lappd, Frances M., 172

laugh tracks, 37-38, 39

Lefebvre, Henri, 63

Lefties, 118-121

legislation, 189

leisure time, 105

Lenin,V.I.,103

Leontiev, Wassily, 204

Lettrist International, 99, 103

leverage points, 130-131

"libido of the ugly," 7

Life on the Screen (Turkle), 44, 45

Lincoln, Abraham, 68

Linklater, Richard, 102

Lipstick Traces (Marcus), 100

litigation, 189, 193-197

"livability index," 17

Living Green, 171

logging industry, 30-31, 153-154

logic freaks, 116

logos, corporate, 20-2 1 , 26, 38, 72, 1 3 1 ,

149, 167
Los Angeles, Calif., 103
Los Angeles Times, 34
Lowary, Robert L., 33
Lowery, Donald, 32
Loy, David, 157
Lungren, Dan, 161
lying, 143

Index

243

McDonald's, 26, 78, 79, 132, 133, 135,

150-153,174,175
McDonald's Student Center, 70
McLuhan, Marshall, xix, 102, 123, 149
macromemes, 124
Magna Carta, 185
"Malaise Generation," 114
"male gaze," 76

Manchurian Candidate, The, 40-41
Mandela, Nelson, 2 1 1
Mander, Jerry, 15
manic-depressive disorder, 9
Marcus, Greil, 100, 104, 108
marketing:

evolution of, 164

see also demarketing
Marquette University, 34
Marshall, Thurgood, 160
Maslow, Abraham, 106
Massachusetts Bay Company, 66
Maxwell House coffee, 172, 174
"mayhem test," 194
Meadows, Donella, 130, 131
meaning, xi

media, xi.xvii, 24, 185-199

agenda of, 17

censorship and, 119

corporate advertisers' control of, 33-35

effects of violence in, 12, 188

"ladder of truth" and, 187-188

newness of, 12

ownership of, 25, 186-187

refraining debate in, 150-153

struggle against commercial control of,
190-199

ubiquity of, 186

see also television
Media Carta, 124, 189-190, 192, 198-199
Media Foundation, see Adbusters Media

Foundation
meditation, 106
memes, 1 75, 1 9 1 , 204, 208, 2 1 1

definition of, 123

geopolitical warfare over, 123-127

meta-, 124, 185
Mencken, H. L., 7

mental pollution, see ecology of mind

metamemes, 124, 185
Michigan, 160
Microsoft, 193
Milan, 213
Milosz, Czeslaw, 99
"mindbombs," 133
"moments of truth," xiv-xv
Monsanto, 70, 79, 132, 158
mood disorders, 10, 12, 1 15

caused by detachment from nature, 3-7
Moore, Art, 32
Moore, Marianne, 14-15
Morain Valley Community College, 70
"moral acts," 6
Morgan, J. P., 67
Mormon Church, 171
Mother Jones, 118

movies, product placement in, 38-39
MTV, 15-17,25

MUDs (Multiple-User Domains), 44, 45,
46

Multinational Agreement on Investment

(MAI), 70-71
Multinational Monitor, 118
multiple chemical sensitivity, 9
Murdoch, Rupert, 25, 186
"Mystical Forests," 30-3 1

Nader's Raiders, 119
Nation, 118

National Film Board, 16
National Institute of Mental Health, 10
National Lawyers Guild, 161
National Organization for Women, 161
nature, detachment from, 3-7
NBC, 32,35,132,196
Nebraska, 94-95
negamarketing, 164

neoclassical trance, breaking of, 204-209

Nepal Television, 25

Nescafe, 172

Net, see Internet

Netheads, 46

New Deal, 69

News Corporation, 186, 193
NewsHour, 34
newspapers, 25

244

Index

New York, N.Y., 52,160,167

New York (state), 160, 163

New Yorker, 34

New York Observer, 9

New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), 93

New York Times, 23, 34

Niedzviecki, Hal, 114

Nike,39,101,149

1984 (Orwell), 198

Nobel Prizewinners, 201

noise, 13-15, 16

North Korea, 23, 115

North River Sugar Refining Corporation,

160
nostalgia, 59
Notre Dame, 103

NYSE (New York Stock Exchange), 93

obesity, 12,79

"Obsession Fetish," 31, 177

obsessive/compulsive disorder, 9

Oh, What a Blow That Phantom Gave Me!

(Carpenter), 45
Ohio, 160

On Killing (Grossman), 188
Organization for Economic Co-operation

and Development (OECD), 70
Origin of Economic Ideas, The (Routh),

206

Orwell, George, 192, 198

Our Ecological Footprint (Rees and

Wackemagel), 87
Overspent American, TTie(Schor), 114, 171

Palos Hills, 111., 70
panic attacks, 9
paradigm shifts, 204
Paris, xvi, 95,213
Parks, Rosa, 211
Pavlov, Ivan, 1 5
PBS, 34,191
peak experiences, 106
Pennsylvania, 67, 160
Pepsi, 25, 70
"Perpendiculaires," 102
petitions, J 95
on Internet, 132

Philip Morris, 131, 132, 151, 158, 159, 162,

163, 172
pincer strategy, 134-136, 174
PIRG (Public Interest Research Group),

119

planned obsolescence, 82
Plant, Sadie, 117

plenitude, suffering caused by, 1 1

politeness, 147

politics:

corporate control of, xii

viewed as outmoded, xvi
Popcorn, Faith, 169
Portland, Oreg., 179
Postman, Neil, 24

Prayer for Owen Meany, A (Irving), 46-47

Presley, Elvis, 63

price, see true cost

printing press, 185

"Product Is You, The," 142

product placement, 38-39, 166

Program on Corporations, Law and

Democracy, 145-146
progress, redefinition of, 201-209
"Project Censored," 119
protests and sit-ins, virtual, 132-133
psychoanalysis, 212
psycho-effluent, 21
psychological ailments, 9-10
"Psychology As If the Whole Earth

Mattered," 6
psychopharmacology, 212
"psycho-rage," 141

Public Interest Research Group (PIRG),
119

pyramid schemes, 90-92, 94

radio, 190-191
rage, 139-143

finding right target for, 139-140
Rainforest Action Network, 161
Ramsey, JonBenet, 76
RayBan Wayfarers, 38
Reagan, Ronald, 209
"reality index," 22
recycling, 112
Redefining Progress, 90

Index

Reebok, 39
Rees, William, 87
Reese's Pieces, 38
"restless legs," 9
revolution, xvii, 123

agents of change in, 2 1 1-2 1 5

as paradigm shift, 204

rage and, 139

Situationists and.xvi, 104, 107-109
"Revolution," 101

Revolutionary War, U.S., 65, 66, 145
Revolution of Everyday Life, The

(Vaneigem), 104
Risky Business, 38
Ritalin, 10
rituals, 55
R. J. Reynolds, 158
Robin, Vicki, 169
"Rocky Mountain High," 34-35
Rocky Mountain Media Watch, 194
Rolt,L.T.C, 105-106
Romania, 90
Rome, 213

Roosevelt, Franklin D., 69
Roszak, Theodore, 6
Rotten, Johnny, 100
Routh, Guy, 206
Russia, 90

San Francisco, Calif., 179

Santa Clara County v. Southern Pacific

Railroad, 68-69, 161
satori, 106

Satoriin the Right Context, 106
Scarcity or Abundance? A Debate on the

Environment (Simon), 87
Schiffer, Claudia, 23
Schmalz, Bill, 30
Schor, Juliet, 114, 171
Schumacher, E. F., 172
science, 204

Seasonal Affective Disorder, 9
Second Bank of the United States, 67
self, loss of, 4, 45—47
self-esteem, 12,76

septic wedding reception, urban legend
about, 61

Serbia, 90

sex, on television, 15, 17-18, 23
sex addiction, 9
Sex Pistols, 100
sexuality, 74, 175-176
Shakespeare, William, 135
"Shaqing,"81

shareholder responsibility, 158-159
shock ads, 22-23

shopping cart "moment of truth," xiv-xv
Sierra Club, 153
Silent Spring (Carson), 26, 27
Simon, Julian, 87
Simon Fraser University, 1 17
sit-ins and protests, virtual, 132-133
Situationist International (SI), xvii, 45,
99-109,121,213,214

history of, 100-101

journal of, 103

philosophy of, 101, 102-109

revolution predicted by, xvi

successor group to, 102
Skippy peanut butter, 20-21
slackers, 53-54,114-115
"slippages," 45

Small Is Beautiful (Schumacher), 172
smoking, see cigarette companies
social marketing, 164
"society of spectacle," xvi, 108-109
Society of Spectacle, The (Debord), 104
Solow, Robert, 87
Solzhenitsyn, Alexander, 169
"soma," xiii, xv, 198
Sonoma State University, 1 19
Sorkin, Aaron, 38
sovereignty, 153-155
Soviet Union, 33,118,215
spectacle, xvi, 101, 104-105, 107,
108-109, 140

"integrated," 2 14

uncooling of, 181-183
Spelling, Aaron, 140
spirituality, 212
spontaneity, 106-108, 129
Sports Night, 38
Standard Oil Trust, 160
stimulation addiction, 14

246

Index

stock market, 93-94, 158-159

"corrections" in, 93
Stringfield, Sherry, 169
Structure of Scientific Revolutions, The

(Kuhn),204
Style with Elsa Klensch, 178
"subvertisements," 131-132, 133-134
suffering, plenitude as cause of, 1 1
Summers, Lawrence, 87
Supreme Court, Canada, 194
Supreme Court, U.S., 160, 196
Surgeon General's Office, 188
Swingers, 81

Telecommunications Inc. (T.C.I. ),
186

telephone companies, 147
telephone solicitation, 147-148
Teletubbies, 16

television, xi, xii, xiii, xv, 7, 14, 25, 29-35,
102,112,131,141-143,187,192

Adbusters abstinence campaign for,
31-32,56, 193

addiction to, 189

advertising on, 19

advertising rates for, 184

amount of violence on, 194

body image and self-esteem and, 1 2

corporate advertisers' control of, 33-35

directing rage at, 140

jamming on, 133-134

jolts on, 15-16, 17

laugh tracks on, 37-38, 39

reality displaced by, 1 1-12

real-world crime and, 188

shock induced on, 17-18

"uncommercials" blocked from,
29-33

voter apathy and, 12

withdrawal from, 3-4
television licenses, 193-194
Thailand, 25

Thoreau, Henry David, xv
Tiananmen Square, 211
Tightwad Gazette, 171
Time Warner, 186, 193
tinnitus, 14

Tobacco Institute, 160
Tokyo, 118-1 19, 157
tourists, "framing" by, 44-45
Toys "R" Us, 70

"transformative" Internet sites, 44
Tristar Pictures, 39
true cost, 124, 180-181
Truman Show, The, 107-108
trusts, corporate, 69
Truth and Economics (Banks), 90
Turkle, Sherry, 44, 45, 46
"TVTurnoffWeek,"31-32, 56, 193
Two-Minute Media Revolution, petition
for, 195

UCLA, 79

uncommercials, 133-134
uncooling, 172-183

of America™, xvi-xvii

of cars, 179-181

of cigarette companies, 13, 125-127

of consumption, 169-172

of fashion industry, 131, 175-179

of fast food, 172-175

of spectacle, 181-183
Union Carbide, 158
United Nations, 188

Universal Declaration of Human Rights,

186,196,199
Unocal Corporation, 161
unreality, 21-22

vacations, 104

Vacco, Dennis, 160

Vaneigem, Raul, 104

Viacom, 186

Victoria, 190-191,206

Victoria, University of, 206-209

VideoCarte, 21

video-editing technology, 16

Vietnam War, 139,208

violence, on television, 12, 15, 17,23

"violin deformity," 75

virtual protests and sit-ins, 132-133

"voluntary simplicity," 1 69

volunteer work, 89

voter apathy, television and, 12

i

Index

247

Wall Street Journal, 32
Warning to Humanity, 201
Watts riot, 103
"Web Central" (Weldon), 46
Weldon, Fay, 46

Western Canada Wilderness Committee,
153

WHDH-TV, 193
White, Byron R., 160
white noise, 14
Whitman, Walt, 45
Windolf, Jim, 9

women, body image and, 75-76

women's rights, 155

World Academy of Science, 87

World Bank, 70, 85,87

World Court, 131,196

World Health Organization (WHO), 13

World Trade Organization (WTO), 70, 85

World War II, 65

World War III, 123-124, 149

WorldWatch Institute, 179

Wynn, William, 160-161

Your Money or Your Life (Robin and
Dominguez), 169

Z, 118

Zen Buddhism, 106, 107

About the Author

I was born in Tallinn, Estonia, during the middle of World War II, and spent my
childhood years in a German displaced persons tamp. When I was seven, my family
immigrated to Australia, where I later earned a B.Sc. in pure and applied mathemat-
ics from the University of Adelaide. My first job was with the Australian Defense
Department playing computer-simulated war games in the Pacific Ocean. While 1
was on a trip to Europe to find my roots, my boat stopped over in Yokohama; I fell
in love with Japan and was unable to get back on the boat. 1 started a market
research company in Tokyo, made a lot of money, traveled the world, and finally
returned to Japan to marry Masako Tominaga. In 1970, we immigrated to Vancou-
ver, Canada, where I started a film commune. Over the next few years, my experi-
mental shorts and documentaries were broadcast on PBS, on CBC and around the
world, winning over fifteen international awards.

In 1989, my work in film led to an epiphany. I produced a thirty-second TV spot
about the disappearing old-growth forests of the Pacific Northwest, then discovered
to my dismay that no TV station would sell me any airtime. Since then I've been
fighting the human rights battle of our information age: the battle for the right to
communicate, to receive and impart ideas and information through any media,
regardless of frontiers. The Media Foundation, Adbusters magazine, Powersoft Adver-
tising Agency and the Culture Jammers Network — my projects for the past ten years —
all stem from that moment's realization: that there is no democracy on the airwaves.

The Culture Jammers Network

We are a loose global network of artists, activists, writers, students, educators and
entrepreneurs who want to launch the new social activist movement of the infor-
mation age. Our aim is to topple existing power structures and forge a major shift
in the way we will live in the twenty-first century. We believe culture jamming
will become to our era what civil rights was to the '60s, what feminism was to the
'70s, what environmental activism was to the '80s. It will alter the way we live and
think. It will change the way information flows, the way institutions wield power,
the way TV stations are run, the way the food, fashion, automobile, sports, music
and culture industries set their agendas. Above all, it will change the way we
interact with the mass media and the way meaning is produced in our society.

FIND OUT MORE ABOUT US

Visit the Culture Jammers Campaign Headquarters:

www.adbusters.org

TALK TO US

Call (604)736-9401, fax (604)737-6021 or write:
Adbusters Media Foundation
1243 West 7th Avenue
Vancouver, B.C. V6H 1B7, Canada

JOIN THE NETWORK

Put your e-mail address on our listserv and receive news
releases, campaign bulletins and strategic updates:
jammers@adbusters.org

SUBSCRIBE TO ADBUSTERS MAGAZINE

Phone I -800-663- 1 243

or e-mail: subscriptions@adbusters.org

SOCIAL SCIENCE/POPULAR CULTURE

An eloquent call to arms to end the "branding"
of America and return to authentic culture.

America is no longer a country but a multimillion-dollar brand, says Kalle Lasn and his
fellow "culture jammers." The founder of Adbusters magazine, Lasn aims to stop the
branding of America by changing the way information flows; the way institutions wield
power; the way television stations are run; and the way the food, fashion, automobile,
sports, music, and culture industries set agendas. With a courageous and compelling
voice, Lasn deconstructs the advertising culture and our fixation on icons and brand
names. And he shows how to organize resistance against the power trust that manages
the brands by "uncooiing" consumer items, by "dermarketing" fashions and celebrities,
and by breaking the "media trance" of our TV-addicted age.

A powerful manifesto by a leading media activist, Culture Jam lays the foundations
for the most significant social movement of the early twenty-first century — a movement
that can change the world and the way we think and live.

"A brilliant and essential manual for our species."

—David C. Korten, author of The Post-Corporate World: Life After Capitalism

I

"This is the culture jammer's call to reverse the suicidal
consumer binges while there is still time."

—George Gerbner, founder of the Cultural Environment Movement

"Kalle Lasn is challenging the mental stranglehold of advertising culture."

—Polly Ghazi, Resurgence magazine

Kalle Lasn is an internationally known, award -winning documentarist He
is publisher of Adbusters magazine and founder of the Adbusters Media
jjgm Foundation and Powershift Advertising Agency. Lasn has dedicated him-

coll tn Ipnnrhinn enHsl marl/ptinn ramnainnc cnrh ac Rim Mr,thinn Pla\/

iky luuiii/inii^ juuiui 1 1 ui ivuui ty wet! 1 1 pui y 1 1 j ju\jii uo uu) ijuiiiiiitj Lyuy

and TV Turnoff Week and to fighting legal battles for the right to access
.the public airwaves. He lives in Vancouver, Ganada.

An Imprint ^fcdarperCollinsPutt/sters
www.lrarpercollins.com

Cover photograph ^Bpugtus Wliyte
^folljfxphqtograpl) by flfefr Etkin

CANADA S19.95 f V

ISBN 0-688-17805-7

9 ! ,'8055

5 1300